1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 \begin_inset Index idx
5254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5265 time for the differences.
5274 are identical except for one difference:
5278 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5287 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5291 Here's an example of the
5304 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5306 See – no indentation!
5310 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5311 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5312 the other paragraph.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 Here's another example, this time in the
5323 \begin_layout Quotation
5329 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5330 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5331 the first line, then
5335 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5339 you were quoting other text.
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5343 Here's a new paragraph.
5344 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5345 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 As the examples show,
5353 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5354 They should put quotes in the
5359 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5363 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5368 \begin_inset Index idx
5371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 Which I did not rehearse!
5415 It could be much worse.
5416 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5418 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5419 indented a bit more than the first.
5420 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 And make things look fine
5430 \begin_inset Newline newline
5436 arg "newline-insert newline"
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5447 does not indent both margins.
5448 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5449 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5456 arg "newline-insert newline"
5462 \begin_layout Subsection
5464 \begin_inset Index idx
5467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5483 \begin_layout Standard
5484 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5494 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5503 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5504 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5505 describing some general features of all four of them.
5508 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5512 \begin_layout Standard
5513 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5515 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5524 reset the environment to
5528 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5529 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5530 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5534 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5538 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5545 \begin_layout Standard
5546 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5547 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5549 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5550 you read all of section
5551 \begin_inset space ~
5555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5557 reference "sec:Nesting"
5564 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5566 \begin_inset Index idx
5569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5590 paragraph environment.
5591 It has the following properties:
5594 \begin_layout Itemize
5595 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5600 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5603 \begin_layout Itemize
5604 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5608 \begin_layout Itemize
5609 The items can have any length.
5610 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5611 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5618 \begin_layout Itemize
5623 environment inside another
5627 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5631 \begin_layout Itemize
5632 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5636 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5639 \begin_layout Itemize
5641 \begin_inset space ~
5645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5647 reference "sec:Nesting"
5651 for a full explanation of nesting.
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5656 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5665 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5668 \begin_layout Standard
5669 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5670 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5673 \begin_layout Itemize
5674 The label for the first level
5678 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5682 \begin_layout Itemize
5683 The label for the second level is a dash.
5687 \begin_layout Itemize
5688 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5692 \begin_layout Itemize
5693 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5697 \begin_layout Itemize
5698 Back out to the third level.
5702 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 Back to the second level.
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5708 Back to the outermost level.
5711 \begin_layout Standard
5712 These are the default labels for an
5717 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5719 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5722 dialog in the submenu
5727 \begin_inset Index idx
5730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5736 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5739 \begin_layout Standard
5740 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5741 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5743 \begin_inset space ~
5747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5749 reference "sec:Nesting"
5756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5758 \begin_inset Index idx
5761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5770 name "sec:Enumerate"
5777 \begin_layout Standard
5782 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5783 It has these properties:
5786 \begin_layout Enumerate
5787 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5791 \begin_layout Enumerate
5792 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5797 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5800 \begin_layout Enumerate
5805 environment resets the counter to one.
5808 \begin_layout Enumerate
5821 \begin_layout Enumerate
5822 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5823 Items can have any length.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5834 \begin_layout Enumerate
5835 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5839 \begin_layout Standard
5848 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5849 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5856 \begin_layout Enumerate
5857 The first level of an
5861 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5865 \begin_layout Enumerate
5866 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5870 \begin_layout Enumerate
5871 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5879 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5885 \begin_layout Enumerate
5886 Back to the third level
5890 \begin_layout Enumerate
5891 Back to the second level.
5895 \begin_layout Enumerate
5896 Back to the outermost level.
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5900 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5904 environment, see section
5905 \begin_inset space ~
5909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5911 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5916 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5920 There is more to nesting
5924 environments than we've stated here.
5925 You should read section
5926 \begin_inset space ~
5930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5932 reference "sec:Nesting"
5936 to learn more about nesting.
5939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5941 \begin_inset Index idx
5944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5958 list has no fixed label.
5959 Instead, LyX uses the first
5960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5967 of the first line as the label.
5971 \begin_layout Description
5972 Example: This is an example of the
5979 \begin_layout Standard
5980 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5993 it is meant that the first usage of the
5997 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5999 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6007 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6012 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6013 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6015 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset space ~
6025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6027 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6031 for more information.) Here is an example:
6034 \begin_layout Description
6036 \begin_inset space ~
6039 Example: This one shows how to use a
6042 \begin_inset space ~
6054 \begin_layout Description
6055 Usage: You should use the
6059 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6060 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6062 It's not a good idea to use a
6066 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6067 You're better off using
6079 paragraphs into them.
6082 \begin_layout Description
6083 Nesting: You can nest
6087 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6091 \begin_layout Standard
6092 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6093 them from the first line.
6096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6098 \begin_inset Index idx
6101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6110 \begin_layout Standard
6115 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6118 \begin_layout Standard
6127 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6129 Here are its properties:
6132 \begin_layout Labeling
6133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6135 \begin_inset space ~
6138 labels LyX uses the first
6139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6146 of each line as the item label.
6151 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6152 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6153 space as described above.
6156 \begin_layout Labeling
6157 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6158 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6159 the body of the item text.
6160 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6161 label width plus a little extra space.
6165 \begin_layout Labeling
6166 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6168 \begin_inset space ~
6171 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6173 If the label width is larger, the label
6174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6181 into the first line.
6182 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6183 margin of the rest of the item text.
6186 \begin_layout Labeling
6187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6189 \begin_inset space ~
6192 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6197 environment has the same left margin.
6198 \begin_inset Newline newline
6201 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6204 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6206 \begin_inset space ~
6211 dialog (toolbar button
6214 arg "layout-paragraph"
6221 \begin_inset space ~
6226 determines the default label width.
6227 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6236 multiple times instead.
6237 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6246 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6254 every time you alter a label in a
6259 \begin_inset Newline newline
6262 The predefined default width is the length of
6263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6277 \begin_layout Standard
6282 list the same way as the
6286 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6292 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6296 \begin_layout Standard
6301 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6302 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6304 \begin_inset space ~
6308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6310 reference "sec:Nesting"
6314 to learn about nesting.
6317 \begin_layout Standard
6318 There is yet another feature of the
6322 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6324 You can use additional
6328 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6333 are documented in section
6334 \begin_inset space ~
6338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6340 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6345 Here are some examples:
6348 \begin_layout Labeling
6349 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6350 Left The default for
6357 \begin_layout Labeling
6358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6359 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6366 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6369 \begin_layout Labeling
6370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6375 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6382 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6385 \begin_layout Subsection
6387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6389 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6394 \begin_inset Index idx
6397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6406 \begin_layout Standard
6407 The features described in this section require that the module
6409 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6411 is loaded in the document settings.
6412 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6417 \begin_inset Index idx
6420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6421 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6429 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6430 Custom Enumerate Lists
6431 \begin_inset Index idx
6434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6435 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6443 \begin_layout Standard
6445 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6448 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6451 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6452 There you add the command
6455 \begin_layout Standard
6463 \begin_layout Standard
6464 in TeX Code (shortcut
6474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6475 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6476 \begin_inset space ~
6480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6482 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6495 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6502 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6503 For capital Roman numerals replace
6515 in the command above.
6516 For Arabic numerals use
6524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6531 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6548 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6556 You can only number 26
6557 \begin_inset space ~
6560 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6568 \begin_layout Standard
6569 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6570 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6573 \begin_layout Standard
6574 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6577 \begin_layout Enumerate
6578 \begin_inset Argument 1
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6607 \begin_layout Enumerate
6608 \begin_inset Argument 1
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6634 \begin_layout Enumerate
6639 \begin_layout Enumerate
6640 \begin_inset Argument 1
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6667 \begin_layout Enumerate
6668 \begin_inset Argument 1
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6698 For this list these commands were used:
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6712 \begin_inset Newline newline
6720 \begin_inset Newline newline
6728 \begin_inset Newline newline
6738 \begin_layout Standard
6745 makes the label emphasized and
6754 \begin_layout Standard
6755 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6763 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6764 lists until you change the definition.
6772 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6774 \begin_inset Index idx
6777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6786 \begin_layout Standard
6787 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6790 \begin_layout Enumerate
6791 \begin_inset Argument 1
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 \begin_inset Note Note
6816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 goes back to default numbering
6825 \begin_layout Enumerate
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6833 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6837 \begin_layout Standard
6838 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6843 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6844 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6864 \begin_layout Standard
6865 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6867 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6868 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6869 of a normal enumeration.
6870 There, insert the command
6873 \begin_layout Standard
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6884 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_layout Enumerate
6896 \begin_layout Standard
6897 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6920 This enumeration starts at 4
6923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6925 \begin_inset Index idx
6928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6938 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6940 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6943 \begin_layout Itemize
6947 \begin_layout Itemize
6948 with standard spacing
6951 \begin_layout Standard
6952 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6954 Add there the command
6958 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6961 \begin_layout Itemize
6962 \begin_inset Argument 1
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_layout Itemize
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6999 \begin_inset Index idx
7002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7003 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7009 For more information see its documentation,
7010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7019 \begin_layout Standard
7020 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7022 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7023 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7027 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7030 \begin_layout Enumerate
7031 \begin_inset Argument 1
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7042 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7055 \begin_layout Enumerate
7056 with negative indentation
7059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7060 Further Customization
7061 \begin_inset Index idx
7064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 Lists ! Customization
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 You can also change the style of description lists.
7078 \begin_layout Standard
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7085 changes the description label font, the command
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 sets the list style.
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 An example where the command
7102 \begin_layout Standard
7107 itshape, style=nextline
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7114 \begin_layout Description
7116 \begin_inset space ~
7120 \begin_inset Argument 1
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7129 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7131 itshape, style=nextline
7141 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7142 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7146 \begin_layout Description
7148 \begin_inset space ~
7151 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7152 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7153 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7156 \begin_layout Standard
7157 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7163 \begin_inset Index idx
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7167 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7173 For more information see its documentation
7174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7183 \begin_layout Subsection
7185 \begin_inset Index idx
7188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7199 \begin_inset space ~
7202 Address: An Overview
7205 \begin_layout Standard
7206 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7214 \begin_inset space ~
7220 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7221 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7222 In contrast, you can use the
7229 \begin_inset space ~
7234 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7235 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7239 \begin_layout Standard
7240 Of course, you're not limited to using
7247 \begin_inset space ~
7256 \begin_inset space ~
7261 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7262 some European academic papers.
7265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7269 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7276 \begin_layout Standard
7281 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7282 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7286 \begin_inset space ~
7291 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7292 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7293 Here's an example of each:
7296 \begin_layout Right Address
7298 \begin_inset Newline newline
7302 \begin_inset Newline newline
7306 \begin_inset Newline newline
7309 When is it? What is today?
7312 \begin_layout Standard
7316 \begin_inset space ~
7322 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7323 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7324 Here's an example of the
7331 \begin_layout Address
7333 \begin_inset Newline newline
7336 Where do I send this
7337 \begin_inset Newline newline
7340 Your post office and country
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7344 As you can see, both
7351 \begin_inset space ~
7356 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7361 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7367 This makes sense, since
7375 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7376 Thus, you have to use
7383 arg "newline-insert newline"
7388 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7389 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7395 \begin_inset space ~
7400 ) to start a new line in an
7407 \begin_inset space ~
7415 \begin_layout Subsection
7419 \begin_layout Standard
7420 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7421 or list of references.
7422 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7427 \begin_inset Index idx
7430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 \begin_layout Standard
7444 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7445 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7446 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7447 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7461 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7462 The book document classes ignores the
7466 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7470 in a letter document class.
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7478 environment does several things for you.
7479 First, it puts the centered label
7480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7488 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7490 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7491 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7492 the subsequent text.
7493 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7494 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7498 \begin_layout Standard
7499 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7503 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7504 The new paragraph will still be in the
7509 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7510 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7514 \begin_inset Float figure
7519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7521 \begin_inset Graphics
7522 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7530 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7535 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7556 \begin_layout Standard
7557 We would love to demonstrate the
7561 environment, but since this document is in the
7562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7569 class, we can't do this.
7570 We inserted it therefore as figure
7571 \begin_inset space ~
7575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7577 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7582 If you have never heard of an
7583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7590 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7593 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7595 \begin_inset Index idx
7598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7607 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7619 environment is used to list references.
7620 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7621 only use it at the end of the document.
7633 \begin_layout Standard
7634 When you first open a
7638 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7654 depending on the document class.
7655 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7656 Each paragraph of the
7660 environment is a bibliography entry.
7665 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7666 Each new paragraph is still in the
7673 \begin_layout Standard
7674 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7675 by using a BibTeX database.
7676 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7677 phy handling, have a look at section
7678 \begin_inset space ~
7682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7684 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7691 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 Special Environments
7695 \begin_layout Standard
7696 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7697 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7704 \begin_inset Index idx
7707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7723 \begin_layout Standard
7728 environment is a LyX extension.
7729 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7734 key as a fixed whitespace.
7738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7750 \begin_inset space ~
7755 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7768 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7770 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7773 arg "newline-insert newline"
7790 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7791 So, when you finish using the
7795 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7796 Also, you can nest the
7800 environment inside of others.
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7804 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7807 \begin_layout Itemize
7811 arg "newline-insert newline"
7814 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7819 \begin_inset space \space{}
7829 arg "newline-insert newline"
7835 \begin_layout Itemize
7839 arg "newline-insert newline"
7849 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7855 \begin_layout Itemize
7856 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7857 You must put at least one
7861 in any line you want blank.
7862 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7865 \begin_layout Itemize
7866 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7870 since that will insert
7875 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7878 arg "self-insert \""
7884 \begin_layout Standard
7888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7896 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7900 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7904 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7905 printf("Hello World!
7910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7914 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7918 \begin_layout Standard
7919 This is just the standard
7920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7931 \begin_layout Standard
7936 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7938 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7939 as if you used a typewriter.
7940 \begin_inset Index idx
7943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7944 Paragraph environments|)
7949 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7952 Program Code Listings
7957 \begin_inset space ~
7965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7969 \begin_inset Index idx
7972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7981 \begin_layout Standard
7986 environment is similar to the
7990 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7991 computer console text.
7996 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8009 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8010 you can have empty lines.
8022 \begin_layout Itemize
8023 have a certain language and a text style
8026 \begin_layout Itemize
8027 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8028 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8032 \begin_layout Itemize
8033 contain the following characters (you will get LaTeX errors): µ ; ´ ; ³
8037 \begin_layout Standard
8038 Because of these properties
8042 works like a typewriter.
8046 \begin_layout Verbatim
8050 \begin_layout Verbatim
8053 The following 2 lines are empty:
8056 \begin_layout Verbatim
8060 \begin_layout Verbatim
8064 \begin_layout Verbatim
8065 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8070 \begin_layout Section
8071 Nesting Environments
8072 \begin_inset Index idx
8075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8076 Nesting ! Environments
8082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8091 \begin_layout Subsection
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8098 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8100 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8102 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8114 \begin_layout Enumerate
8118 \begin_layout Enumerate
8123 \begin_layout Enumerate
8127 \begin_layout Enumerate
8132 \begin_layout Enumerate
8136 \begin_layout Standard
8137 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8138 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8140 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8142 \begin_inset space ~
8146 \begin_inset space ~
8154 \begin_inset space ~
8158 \begin_inset space ~
8163 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8165 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8168 arg "depth-increment"
8174 arg "depth-decrement"
8188 arg "depth-increment"
8194 arg "depth-decrement"
8198 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8199 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8203 \begin_layout Standard
8204 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8205 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8206 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8207 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8212 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8214 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8217 \begin_layout Subsection
8218 What You Can and Can't Nest
8221 \begin_layout Standard
8222 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8223 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8226 \begin_layout Standard
8227 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8228 than a simple yes or no.
8229 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8232 \begin_layout Itemize
8233 Completely unnestable
8236 \begin_layout Itemize
8237 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8241 \begin_layout Itemize
8242 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8246 \begin_layout Standard
8247 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8248 environments have them:
8251 \begin_layout Description
8252 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8253 Can't nest into them.
8257 \begin_layout Itemize
8263 \begin_layout Itemize
8269 \begin_layout Itemize
8275 \begin_layout Itemize
8281 \begin_layout Itemize
8288 \begin_layout Description
8290 \begin_inset space ~
8293 Nestable You can nest them.
8294 You can nest other things into them.
8298 \begin_layout Itemize
8304 \begin_layout Itemize
8310 \begin_layout Itemize
8316 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8328 \begin_layout Itemize
8334 \begin_layout Itemize
8340 \begin_layout Itemize
8347 \begin_layout Description
8348 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8349 You can't nest anything into them.
8353 \begin_layout Itemize
8359 \begin_layout Itemize
8365 \begin_layout Itemize
8371 \begin_layout Itemize
8377 \begin_layout Itemize
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8389 \begin_layout Itemize
8395 \begin_layout Itemize
8401 \begin_layout Itemize
8407 \begin_layout Itemize
8413 \begin_layout Itemize
8419 \begin_layout Itemize
8425 \begin_layout Itemize
8431 \begin_layout Itemize
8435 \begin_inset space ~
8441 \begin_layout Itemize
8448 \begin_layout Standard
8449 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8457 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8470 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8471 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8472 nested section headings violate this.
8480 \begin_layout Subsection
8481 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8482 \begin_inset Index idx
8485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8486 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8494 \begin_layout Standard
8495 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8496 affected by nesting anyhow.
8500 \begin_layout Itemize
8504 \begin_layout Itemize
8508 \begin_layout Itemize
8512 \begin_layout Standard
8514 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8522 Figures and tables in
8526 are not affected by this.
8531 Have a look at section
8532 \begin_inset space ~
8536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8538 reference "sec:Floats"
8542 for more information about
8549 \begin_layout Standard
8550 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8551 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8555 \begin_layout Standard
8556 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8564 of its own, it behaves just like a
8565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8572 paragraph environment.
8573 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8577 \begin_layout Standard
8578 Here's an example with a table:
8581 \begin_layout Enumerate
8586 \begin_layout Enumerate
8587 This is (a) and it's nested.
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8592 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8598 \begin_layout Standard
8600 \begin_inset Tabular
8601 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8602 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8603 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8604 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8688 \begin_layout Standard
8689 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8696 \begin_layout Enumerate
8698 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8702 \begin_layout Enumerate
8706 \begin_layout Standard
8707 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8710 \begin_layout Enumerate
8715 \begin_layout Enumerate
8716 This is (a) and it's nested.
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8721 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8727 \begin_layout Standard
8729 \begin_inset Tabular
8730 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8731 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8732 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8733 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8817 \begin_layout Standard
8818 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8824 \begin_layout Enumerate
8831 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8834 \begin_layout Enumerate
8838 \begin_layout Standard
8839 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8844 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8846 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8849 \begin_layout Enumerate
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate
8855 This is (a) and it's nested.
8858 \begin_layout Standard
8859 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8865 \begin_layout Standard
8867 \begin_inset Tabular
8868 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8869 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8870 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8871 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8956 \begin_layout Standard
8957 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8963 \begin_layout Enumerate
8965 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8972 \begin_layout Enumerate
8976 \begin_layout Standard
8977 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8983 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8984 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8988 \begin_layout Subsection
8989 Usage and General Features
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8993 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9002 is the innermost possible depth.
9003 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9006 \begin_layout Enumerate
9007 level #1 – outermost
9011 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 \begin_layout Enumerate
9026 \begin_layout Itemize
9031 \begin_layout Itemize
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9041 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9042 both of them in the example.
9043 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9053 For example, if we tried to nest another
9058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9065 , we would get errors.
9068 \begin_layout Subsection
9070 \begin_inset Index idx
9073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9082 \begin_layout Standard
9083 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9084 We have several examples of nested environments.
9085 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9090 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9093 \begin_layout Labeling
9094 \labelwidthstring MMM
9095 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9104 \begin_layout Labeling
9105 \labelwidthstring MMM
9106 #2-a This is level #2.
9107 We created it by using
9110 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9116 arg "depth-increment"
9123 \begin_layout Labeling
9124 \labelwidthstring MMM
9125 #3-a This is level #3.
9126 This time, we just enter
9133 arg "depth-increment"
9137 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9141 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9147 arg "depth-increment"
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9159 environment, nested inside of
9160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9168 So, it's at level #4.
9169 We did this by entering
9172 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9178 arg "depth-increment"
9181 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9186 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9202 \begin_layout Standard
9207 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9210 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9216 \begin_layout Labeling
9217 \labelwidthstring MMM
9218 #4-a This is level #4.
9222 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9225 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9230 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9234 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9239 keep nesting things inside
9240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9251 \begin_layout Labeling
9252 \labelwidthstring MMM
9253 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9258 \begin_layout Labeling
9259 \labelwidthstring MMM
9260 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9261 and this is level #6.
9262 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9266 \begin_layout Labeling
9267 \labelwidthstring MMM
9268 #5-b Back to level #5.
9272 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9278 arg "depth-decrement"
9285 \begin_layout Labeling
9286 \labelwidthstring MMM
9290 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9296 arg "depth-decrement"
9299 , we're back at level #4.
9303 \begin_layout Labeling
9304 \labelwidthstring MMM
9305 #3-b Back to level #3.
9306 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9310 \begin_layout Labeling
9311 \labelwidthstring MMM
9312 #2-b Back to level #2.
9317 \begin_layout Labeling
9318 \labelwidthstring MMM
9319 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9320 After this sentence, we will enter
9324 and change the paragraph environment back to
9331 \begin_layout Standard
9332 We could have also used the
9348 environment in place of the
9353 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9357 Example 2: Inheritance
9360 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9361 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9364 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9373 arg "depth-increment"
9377 \begin_inset Newline newline
9380 which, we will change to the
9388 \begin_layout Enumerate
9393 environment, at level #2.
9396 \begin_layout Enumerate
9397 Notice how the nested
9401 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9405 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9409 \begin_layout Standard
9410 We ended this example by entering
9415 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9419 and reset the nesting depth by using
9422 arg "depth-decrement"
9428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9429 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9438 \begin_inset Argument 1
9441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9442 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9450 \begin_layout Enumerate
9451 This is level #1, in an
9455 paragraph environment.
9456 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9460 \begin_layout Enumerate
9465 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9471 arg "depth-increment"
9475 Now, what happens if we nest an
9479 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9480 label be? An asterisk?
9484 \begin_layout Itemize
9494 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9495 So, its label is a bullet.
9496 (We got here by using
9499 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9505 arg "depth-increment"
9508 , then changing the environment to
9516 \begin_layout Itemize
9517 Here's level #4, produced using
9520 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9526 arg "depth-increment"
9530 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9535 \begin_layout Enumerate
9536 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9538 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9543 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9547 , because we are in the
9555 environment (that is, it is an
9570 \begin_layout Enumerate
9575 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9576 type of numbering does LyX use?
9579 \begin_layout Enumerate
9580 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9583 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9586 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9589 \begin_layout Enumerate
9593 arg "depth-decrement"
9596 to decrease the depth after the next
9599 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9606 \begin_layout Enumerate
9608 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9612 \begin_layout Enumerate
9614 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9615 numeral as the label.Why?
9618 \begin_layout Enumerate
9619 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9628 Notice, however, that LyX
9632 reset the counter for the label.
9636 \begin_layout Enumerate
9640 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9646 arg "depth-decrement"
9649 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9650 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9651 into the twofold-nested
9659 \begin_layout Enumerate
9660 The same thing happens if we do another
9663 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9669 arg "depth-decrement"
9672 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9675 \begin_layout Standard
9676 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9681 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9695 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9701 The same rule applies for the
9705 environment, as well.
9708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9709 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9712 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9714 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9715 the same detail with how we did it.
9724 \begin_layout Standard
9732 arg "depth-increment"
9739 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9740 the example in parentheses someplace.
9741 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9742 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9743 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9747 \begin_layout Enumerate
9752 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9757 Now we will add verse.
9758 \begin_inset Newline newline
9761 It will get much worse.
9762 \begin_inset Newline newline
9772 arg "depth-increment"
9783 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9784 \begin_inset Newline newline
9787 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9788 \begin_inset Newline newline
9794 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9807 \begin_layout Standard
9808 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9814 \begin_layout Standard
9816 \begin_inset Tabular
9817 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9818 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9909 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9919 arg "depth-increment"
9925 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9935 arg "depth-decrement"
9942 \begin_layout Enumerate
9947 : level #1) This is another item.
9948 Note that selecting a
9952 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9953 3 times to put the table inside the
9961 \begin_layout Quotation
9962 We're now ending the
9966 list and changing to
9971 We're still at level #1.
9972 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9973 The next set of paragraphs is a
9974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9981 We will nest both the
9988 \begin_inset space ~
9993 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9997 for the letter body.
10001 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
10004 to preserve the depth.
10005 Remember that you need to use
10008 arg "newline-insert newline"
10011 to create multiple lines inside the
10018 \begin_inset space ~
10028 \begin_layout Right Address
10030 \begin_inset Newline newline
10033 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10034 \begin_inset Newline newline
10040 \begin_layout Address
10042 \begin_inset space ~
10048 \begin_layout Quotation
10049 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10053 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10054 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10055 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10056 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10057 as soon as possible.
10058 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10061 \begin_layout Quotation
10062 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10063 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10064 with your order, along with payment.
10067 \begin_layout Quotation
10068 We thank you again for your patience.
10071 \begin_layout Address
10073 \begin_inset Newline newline
10080 \begin_layout Quotation
10081 That ends that example!
10084 \begin_layout Standard
10085 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10086 just a few keystrokes.
10087 We could have easily nested an
10108 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10111 \begin_layout Section
10112 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10113 \begin_inset Index idx
10116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10125 \begin_layout Standard
10126 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10127 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10128 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10129 be broken at the end of a line.
10130 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10134 \begin_layout Subsection
10136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10138 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10143 \begin_inset Index idx
10146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10155 \begin_layout Standard
10156 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10157 line at that point.
10158 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10161 \begin_layout Quote
10162 Further documentation is given in section
10163 \begin_inset Newline newline
10167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10169 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10177 \begin_layout Standard
10178 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10193 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10202 A protected space is set with
10204 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10205 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10207 \begin_inset space ~
10215 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10221 \begin_layout Subsection
10223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10225 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10230 \begin_inset Index idx
10233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10234 Spacing ! Horizontal
10242 \begin_layout Standard
10243 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10245 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10246 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10250 The length units are listed in Appendix
10251 \begin_inset space ~
10255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10257 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10268 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10273 \begin_inset Index idx
10276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10277 Spaces ! Inter-word
10285 \begin_layout Standard
10286 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10287 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10288 at the ends of sentences.
10289 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10290 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10291 followed by a period; see section
10292 \begin_inset space ~
10296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10298 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10303 To insert a normal space, select
10305 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10306 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10308 \begin_inset space ~
10316 arg "space-insert normal"
10322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10326 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10331 \begin_inset Index idx
10334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10343 \begin_layout Standard
10345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10352 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10361 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10362 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10363 inside abbreviations:
10366 \begin_layout Quote
10368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10372 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10375 \begin_layout Standard
10376 or between values and units.
10377 Compare for example this:
10378 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10386 \begin_inset Newline newline
10389 10 kg (normal space
10392 \begin_layout Standard
10393 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10395 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10396 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10398 \begin_inset space ~
10406 arg "space-insert thin"
10412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10416 \begin_layout Standard
10417 You can also insert the following space types:
10420 \begin_layout Description
10422 \begin_inset space ~
10426 \begin_inset space ~
10429 space A line with a
10430 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10434 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10438 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10441 negative thin space between the arrows.
10444 \begin_layout Description
10446 \begin_inset space ~
10450 \begin_inset space ~
10453 space A line with a
10454 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10458 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10462 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10465 negative medium space between the arrows.
10468 \begin_layout Description
10470 \begin_inset space ~
10474 \begin_inset space ~
10477 space A line with a
10478 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10482 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10486 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10489 negative thick space between the arrows.
10492 \begin_layout Description
10494 \begin_inset space ~
10498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10502 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10506 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10510 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10514 \begin_inset space ~
10518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10521 em) space between the arrows.
10524 \begin_layout Description
10526 \begin_inset space ~
10530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10534 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10538 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10542 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10546 \begin_inset space ~
10550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10553 em) space between the arrows.
10556 \begin_layout Description
10558 \begin_inset space ~
10562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10566 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10570 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10574 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10578 \begin_inset space ~
10582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10585 em) space between the arrows.
10588 \begin_layout Description
10590 \begin_inset space ~
10594 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10598 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10603 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10610 cm space between the arrows.
10613 \begin_layout Standard
10615 \begin_inset space ~
10619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10621 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10625 lists the different space sizes.
10628 \begin_layout Standard
10629 \begin_inset Float table
10634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10635 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10640 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10644 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10654 \begin_inset Tabular
10655 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10656 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10657 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10658 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10722 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10774 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10931 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10933 \begin_inset Index idx
10936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10945 \begin_layout Standard
10946 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10947 in a uniform fashion.
10948 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10949 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10950 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10951 equally between themselves.
10954 \begin_layout Standard
10955 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10958 \begin_layout Quote
10960 This is on the left side
10961 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10964 This is on the right
10967 \begin_layout Quote
10970 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10974 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10980 \begin_layout Quote
10983 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10987 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10991 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10997 \begin_layout Standard
10998 That was an example in the
11004 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11008 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11012 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11015 is one in a standard paragraph.
11016 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11020 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11023 \begin_layout Standard
11024 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11027 \begin_inset space ~
11032 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11035 \begin_layout Standard
11037 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11041 \begin_inset space ~
11047 \begin_layout Standard
11049 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11053 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_layout Standard
11061 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11065 \begin_inset space ~
11071 \begin_layout Standard
11073 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11077 \begin_inset space ~
11083 \begin_layout Standard
11085 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11089 \begin_inset space ~
11095 \begin_layout Standard
11097 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11101 \begin_inset space ~
11107 \begin_layout Standard
11108 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11116 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11120 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11121 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11122 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11126 option in the space dialog.
11134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11138 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11143 \begin_inset Index idx
11146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11155 \begin_layout Standard
11156 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11157 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11160 \begin_layout Standard
11161 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11164 What is correct English?:
11165 \begin_inset Newline newline
11169 \begin_inset Newline newline
11173 \begin_inset space ~
11176 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11177 \begin_inset Newline newline
11181 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11192 \begin_inset Newline newline
11196 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11213 \begin_layout Standard
11215 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11220 \begin_inset space ~
11224 \begin_inset space ~
11228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11232 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11234 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11235 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11239 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11245 \begin_inset space ~
11249 \begin_inset space ~
11253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11256 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11265 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11266 That is why it is named
11267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11275 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11276 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11280 \begin_layout Subsection
11282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11284 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11289 \begin_inset Index idx
11292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 \begin_layout Standard
11302 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11304 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11305 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11307 \begin_inset space ~
11313 There you find the following sizes:
11316 \begin_layout Standard
11329 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11334 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11336 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11337 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11339 \begin_inset space ~
11345 \begin_inset Index idx
11348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 Document ! Settings
11354 for the paragraph separation.
11355 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11366 \begin_layout Standard
11372 \begin_inset Index idx
11375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11381 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11382 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11387 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11388 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11397 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11406 s are described in section
11407 \begin_inset space ~
11411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11413 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11422 If there are several
11426 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11427 You can therefore use
11431 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11434 \begin_layout Standard
11439 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11440 \begin_inset space ~
11444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11446 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11453 \begin_layout Standard
11454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11464 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11465 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11477 \begin_layout Subsection
11478 Paragraph Alignment
11479 \begin_inset Index idx
11482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11483 Paragraph ! Alignment
11491 \begin_layout Standard
11492 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11494 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11497 dialog (toolbar button
11500 arg "layout-paragraph"
11504 There are five possibilities:
11507 \begin_layout Itemize
11515 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11521 \begin_layout Itemize
11529 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11535 \begin_layout Itemize
11543 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11549 \begin_layout Itemize
11557 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11563 \begin_layout Itemize
11571 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11577 \begin_layout Standard
11578 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11579 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11580 the left and right margins.
11581 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11584 \begin_layout Standard
11586 This paragraph is right aligned,
11589 \begin_layout Standard
11591 this one is centered,
11594 \begin_layout Standard
11596 this one is left aligned.
11599 \begin_layout Subsection
11601 \begin_inset Index idx
11604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11605 Page breaks ! Forced
11611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11613 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11620 \begin_layout Standard
11621 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11622 can force a page break where you want one.
11623 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11624 Only if you use a lot of
11628 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11631 \begin_layout Standard
11632 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11633 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11637 have to change the page breaking.
11640 \begin_layout Standard
11641 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11643 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11645 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11646 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11648 \begin_inset space ~
11654 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11656 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11657 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11659 \begin_inset space ~
11664 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11666 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11667 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11670 \begin_layout Standard
11671 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11672 at the top of a page.
11673 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11674 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11675 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11676 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11680 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11684 to learn more about
11691 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11695 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11700 \begin_inset Index idx
11703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11704 Page breaks ! Clear
11712 \begin_layout Standard
11713 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11714 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11715 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11716 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11717 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11720 \begin_layout Standard
11721 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11723 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11724 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11726 \begin_inset space ~
11732 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11734 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11735 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11737 \begin_inset space ~
11741 \begin_inset space ~
11746 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11747 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11750 \begin_layout Subsection
11752 \begin_inset Index idx
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11764 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11771 \begin_layout Standard
11772 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11774 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11776 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11777 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11779 \begin_inset space ~
11783 \begin_inset space ~
11791 arg "newline-insert newline"
11795 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11797 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11798 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11800 \begin_inset space ~
11804 \begin_inset space ~
11812 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11815 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11817 This is useful to avoid
11818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11825 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11828 \begin_layout Standard
11829 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11830 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11831 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11832 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11833 \begin_inset space ~
11837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11839 reference "sec:Quote"
11844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11846 reference "sec:Verse"
11851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11853 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11860 \begin_layout Subsection
11862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11864 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11869 \begin_inset Index idx
11872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11881 \begin_layout Standard
11883 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11894 \begin_layout Standard
11898 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11899 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11901 \begin_inset space ~
11906 you can insert horizontal lines.
11907 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11908 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11909 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11912 \begin_layout Standard
11914 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11925 \begin_layout Section
11926 Characters and Symbols
11929 \begin_layout Standard
11930 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11931 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11932 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11940 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11944 for information on how this is done.
11947 \begin_layout Standard
11948 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11953 dialog via the menu
11955 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11956 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11962 \begin_layout Standard
11963 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11971 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11972 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11973 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11981 \begin_layout Section
11982 Fonts and Text Styles
11983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11985 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11992 \begin_layout Subsection
11994 \begin_inset Index idx
11997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12006 \begin_layout Standard
12007 There are two types of fonts:
12010 \begin_layout Description
12012 \begin_inset space ~
12016 \begin_inset Index idx
12019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12025 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12030 characters) in the font.
12031 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12032 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12033 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12034 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12035 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12036 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12037 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12038 \begin_inset Newline newline
12041 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12042 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12043 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12044 sizes than at small ones.
12045 \begin_inset Newline newline
12059 \begin_inset space ~
12067 \begin_layout Description
12069 \begin_inset space ~
12073 \begin_inset Index idx
12076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12082 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12083 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12084 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12085 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12086 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12087 image manipulation program.
12088 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12089 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12090 \begin_inset space ~
12093 pixels high up to 34
12094 \begin_inset space ~
12097 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12098 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12099 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12101 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12102 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12103 \begin_inset Newline newline
12106 Bitmap fonts are named
12109 \begin_inset space ~
12114 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12117 \begin_layout Standard
12118 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12119 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12120 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12121 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12122 use scalable fonts.
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12129 \begin_layout Standard
12130 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12131 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12132 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12133 font to emphasize text, you use an
12134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12142 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12143 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12147 \begin_layout Subsection
12149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12151 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12158 \begin_layout Standard
12159 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12160 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12161 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12163 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12164 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12165 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12166 to a word processor.
12167 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12168 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12169 across different machines.
12170 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12171 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12173 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12175 \begin_inset space ~
12179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12181 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12186 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12187 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12190 \begin_layout Standard
12191 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12192 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12194 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12195 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12196 that is installed on your system.
12197 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12200 \begin_layout Standard
12201 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12209 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12210 es; so you might have to experiment.
12218 \begin_layout Standard
12219 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12227 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12228 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12236 \begin_layout Subsection
12237 Document Font and Font size
12238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12240 name "sub:Document-Font"
12245 \begin_inset Index idx
12248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12255 \begin_inset Index idx
12258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12267 \begin_layout Standard
12268 You can set the document fonts in the
12270 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12274 \begin_inset Index idx
12277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12278 Document ! Settings
12288 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12289 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12292 \begin_inset space ~
12301 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12303 \begin_inset space ~
12306 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12309 \begin_layout Standard
12316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12325 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12326 This requires that you use
12332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12371 as the output format, i.
12372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12376 \begin_inset space \space{}
12379 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12380 \begin_inset space ~
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12386 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12391 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12392 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12394 \begin_inset space ~
12397 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12398 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12399 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12401 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12404 \begin_layout Standard
12405 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12410 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12415 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12416 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12423 \begin_inset space ~
12429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12442 European Computer Modern
12445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12452 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12464 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12465 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12470 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12473 \begin_inset space ~
12478 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12484 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12485 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12488 \begin_layout Itemize
12492 \begin_inset space ~
12497 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12510 \begin_inset space ~
12515 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12519 as the default font.
12520 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12521 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12524 \begin_inset space ~
12537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12538 One difference is improved kerning.
12546 \begin_layout Itemize
12550 \begin_inset space ~
12554 \begin_inset space ~
12559 fonts in (the rare) case that
12562 \begin_inset space ~
12567 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12582 Virtual means that it
12583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12594 -glyphs from other fonts.
12595 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12617 Loading the LaTeX-package
12622 \begin_inset Index idx
12625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12626 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12631 with the document preamble line
12632 \begin_inset Newline newline
12639 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12640 \begin_inset Newline newline
12645 will fix the guillemet problem.
12650 and that accented characters are not
12654 glyph, but built of
12658 characters, the accent and the letter.
12659 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12665 If you search for example for the French word
12666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12673 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12682 and not for the glyph
12683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12687 \begin_inset space ~
12691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12697 \begin_layout Itemize
12698 If you do not like the look of
12706 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12711 \begin_inset space ~
12717 \begin_inset space ~
12727 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12728 \begin_inset space ~
12731 serif and typewriter fonts,
12735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12736 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12743 \begin_inset space ~
12752 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12757 \begin_inset space \space{}
12765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12769 \begin_inset space \space{}
12775 \begin_inset space ~
12783 \begin_inset space ~
12793 but you can also select your own.
12794 \begin_inset Newline newline
12797 The differences between roman,
12800 \begin_inset space ~
12809 fonts are explained in section
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12816 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12821 \begin_inset Newline newline
12827 \begin_inset space ~
12832 was originally designed for newspapers.
12833 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12834 into the small newspaper columns.
12838 \begin_inset space ~
12843 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12846 \begin_layout Standard
12847 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12860 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12865 depends on the class you are using.
12866 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12869 \begin_layout Standard
12870 Note that the font size is the
12875 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12876 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12877 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12880 \begin_inset space ~
12886 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12887 \begin_inset space ~
12891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12893 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12900 \begin_layout Standard
12904 \begin_inset space ~
12909 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12911 \begin_inset space ~
12914 serif or typewriter.
12919 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12929 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12932 \begin_layout Standard
12941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12950 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12956 \begin_inset Index idx
12959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12960 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12966 \begin_inset space ~
12970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12972 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12977 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12978 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12985 \begin_layout Standard
12986 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12988 Use Old Style Figures
12992 Use True Small Caps
12995 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12998 Use Old Style Figures
13000 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13002 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13010 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13014 Use True Small Caps
13016 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13017 of scaled capitals.
13018 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13019 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13022 \begin_layout Standard
13027 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13028 a font to display the script characters.
13032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13033 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13038 \begin_inset Index idx
13041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13042 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13047 So this has no effect for the document language
13061 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13065 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13073 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13077 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13078 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13079 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13081 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13084 dialog, see section
13085 \begin_inset space ~
13089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13091 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13103 \begin_layout Subsection
13107 \begin_layout Standard
13108 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13110 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13111 choose a math font in the dialog
13113 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13117 \begin_inset Index idx
13120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13121 Document ! Settings
13127 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13128 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13129 default font family
13130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13136 \begin_inset space ~
13142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13146 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13147 the document font is available.
13150 \begin_layout Standard
13151 Note that the math font will not be used for
13155 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13161 or by the insertion of the command
13168 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13169 \begin_inset space ~
13173 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13174 while the math characters do not.
13176 \begin_inset space ~
13179 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13182 \begin_inset space ~
13190 \begin_inset space ~
13195 in the document font settings.
13198 \begin_layout Standard
13199 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13200 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13207 \begin_inset space ~
13213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13216 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13224 \begin_inset space ~
13230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13236 \begin_layout Subsection
13237 Using Different Character Styles
13238 \begin_inset Index idx
13241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13248 \begin_inset Index idx
13251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13260 \begin_layout Standard
13261 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13262 certain paragraph environments.
13263 LyX supports two character styles,
13272 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13276 \begin_layout Standard
13281 style, do one of the following:
13284 \begin_layout Itemize
13285 click on the toolbar button
13294 \begin_layout Itemize
13295 use the key binding
13304 \begin_layout Standard
13305 These commands are all toggles.
13310 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13313 \begin_layout Standard
13314 One typically uses the
13318 style for proper names.
13320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13327 is the original author of LyX.
13328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13334 \begin_layout Standard
13335 A more widely used character style is the
13340 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13347 \begin_layout Itemize
13348 clicking on the toolbar button
13357 \begin_layout Itemize
13358 using the keybindings
13367 \begin_layout Standard
13372 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13373 es use a different font.
13376 \begin_layout Standard
13377 We've been using the
13381 style all over the place in this document.
13382 Here's one more example:
13385 \begin_layout Quotation
13388 Do not overuse character styles!
13391 \begin_layout Standard
13392 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13393 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13394 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13395 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13399 \begin_layout Standard
13400 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13408 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13410 \begin_inset space ~
13413 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13419 arg "dialog-show character"
13425 \begin_layout Subsection
13426 Fine-Tuning with the
13431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13433 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13438 \begin_inset Index idx
13441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13450 \begin_layout Standard
13451 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13452 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13453 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13454 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13455 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13456 from ordinary dialog.
13459 \begin_layout Standard
13460 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13461 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13462 \begin_inset Newline newline
13465 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13466 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13469 \begin_layout Standard
13470 To use custom character styles, open the
13472 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13474 \begin_inset space ~
13477 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13480 dialog or press the toolbar button
13483 arg "dialog-show character"
13487 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13488 font property that you can choose.
13489 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13492 \begin_inset space ~
13497 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13502 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13503 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13504 environments all at once.
13507 \begin_layout Standard
13508 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13511 \begin_inset space ~
13523 \begin_layout Labeling
13524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13538 The possible options are:
13542 \begin_layout Labeling
13543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13548 This is the Roman font family.
13549 Normally a serif font.
13550 It's also the default family.
13560 \begin_layout Labeling
13561 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13565 \begin_inset space ~
13572 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13584 \begin_layout Labeling
13585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13592 This is the Typewriter font family.
13598 arg "font-typewriter"
13607 \begin_layout Labeling
13608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13613 This corresponds to the print weight.
13618 \begin_layout Labeling
13619 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13624 This is the Medium font series.
13625 It's also the default series.
13628 \begin_layout Labeling
13629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13636 This is the Bold font series.
13649 \begin_layout Labeling
13650 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13655 As the name implies.
13660 \begin_layout Labeling
13661 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13666 This is the Upright font shape.
13667 It's also the default shape.
13670 \begin_layout Labeling
13671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13685 s the Italic font shape
13691 \begin_layout Labeling
13692 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13699 This is the Slanted font shape
13701 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13704 \begin_layout Labeling
13705 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13709 \begin_inset space ~
13716 This is the Small caps font shape
13723 \begin_layout Labeling
13724 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13729 Alters the text color.
13730 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13734 \begin_inset space ~
13739 , which means that the document default color set in
13741 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13742 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13748 \begin_inset space ~
13753 is used, you can choose between
13786 \begin_inset Index idx
13789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13798 \begin_layout Labeling
13799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13804 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13805 the language of the document.
13806 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13808 \begin_inset Newline newline
13811 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13812 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13813 When using the spell checking (see section
13814 \begin_inset space ~
13818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13820 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13824 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13827 \begin_layout Labeling
13828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13833 Alters the size of the font.
13834 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13835 proportional to the document font size.
13836 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13837 what you want to do.
13842 \begin_layout Labeling
13843 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13864 arg "font-size tiny"
13870 \begin_layout Labeling
13871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13892 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13898 \begin_layout Labeling
13899 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13920 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13926 \begin_layout Labeling
13927 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13948 arg "font-size small"
13954 \begin_layout Labeling
13955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13969 It's also the default size.
13973 arg "font-size normal"
13979 \begin_layout Labeling
13980 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14001 arg "font-size large"
14007 \begin_layout Labeling
14008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14029 arg "font-size larger"
14035 \begin_layout Labeling
14036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14057 arg "font-size largest"
14063 \begin_layout Labeling
14064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14085 arg "font-size huge"
14091 \begin_layout Labeling
14092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14113 arg "font-size giant"
14119 \begin_layout Labeling
14120 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14125 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14145 arg "font-size increase"
14151 \begin_layout Labeling
14152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14157 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14177 arg "font-size decrease"
14184 \begin_layout Standard
14189 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14190 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14191 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14192 — use those instead.
14193 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14196 \begin_layout Labeling
14197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14202 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14207 \begin_layout Labeling
14208 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14215 This is text with emphasize on
14218 This might seem like the same as
14222 , but it is actually a bit different.
14228 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14230 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14233 \begin_layout Labeling
14234 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14241 This is text with Underbar on.
14247 arg "font-underline"
14253 \begin_inset Newline newline
14258 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14259 when you could not change fonts.
14260 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14261 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14265 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14268 \begin_layout Labeling
14269 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14273 \begin_inset space ~
14280 This is text with Double underbar on.
14286 arg "font-underunderline"
14290 \begin_inset Newline newline
14293 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14294 about double underbar.
14297 \begin_layout Labeling
14298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14302 \begin_inset space ~
14309 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14315 arg "font-underwave"
14319 \begin_inset Newline newline
14322 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14323 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14326 \begin_layout Labeling
14327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14334 This is text with Strikeout on.
14340 arg "font-strikeout"
14344 \begin_inset Newline newline
14347 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14348 changed in the meantime.
14351 \begin_layout Labeling
14352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14359 This is text with Noun on.
14366 , this is a logical attribute.
14367 Normally it's equivalent to
14370 \begin_inset space ~
14379 \begin_layout Standard
14380 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14381 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14383 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14385 \begin_inset space ~
14388 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14394 arg "dialog-show character"
14397 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14398 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14401 arg "textstyle-apply"
14405 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14409 \begin_layout Standard
14410 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14417 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14418 (suppose you just set the shape to
14419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14437 \begin_inset space ~
14449 \begin_layout Standard
14450 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14458 \begin_inset space ~
14470 \begin_layout Itemize
14476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14483 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14501 \begin_inset Newline newline
14505 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14519 \begin_inset Note Note
14522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14523 For more on phantoms see section
14524 \begin_inset space ~
14528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14530 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14540 \begin_inset Newline newline
14546 \begin_layout Itemize
14551 fonts use characters with serifs.
14552 These are the small
14553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14560 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14561 The following example shows the difference:
14562 \begin_inset Newline newline
14566 \begin_inset Newline newline
14571 text without serifs
14574 \begin_inset Newline newline
14577 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14578 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14585 \begin_layout Itemize
14590 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14591 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14592 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14595 \begin_layout Standard
14596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14603 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14604 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14607 \begin_inset space ~
14612 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14613 the property to be removed.
14614 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14615 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14616 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14634 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14635 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14643 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14647 \begin_inset space ~
14652 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14663 If you, for example, set
14664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14682 \begin_inset space ~
14687 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14696 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14699 \begin_layout Standard
14700 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14701 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14704 \begin_layout Section
14705 Printing and Previewing
14708 \begin_layout Subsection
14712 \begin_layout Standard
14713 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14714 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14715 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14716 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14717 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14719 Additional Features
14724 \begin_layout Standard
14725 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14726 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14727 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14728 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14729 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14730 This happens in two stages:
14733 \begin_layout Enumerate
14734 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14735 generating a file with the extension,
14736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14750 \begin_layout Enumerate
14751 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14755 file to produce printable output.
14758 \begin_layout Subsection
14759 Output file formats
14760 \begin_inset Index idx
14763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14772 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14780 Simple text (ASCII)
14781 \begin_inset Index idx
14784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14785 File formats ! ASCII
14793 \begin_layout Standard
14794 This file type has the extension
14795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14807 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14811 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14818 \begin_layout Standard
14819 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14821 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14822 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14824 \begin_inset space ~
14830 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14831 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14832 \begin_inset space ~
14836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14838 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14843 If your document includes such material, use
14845 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14846 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14848 \begin_inset space ~
14852 \begin_inset space ~
14856 \begin_inset space ~
14864 \begin_inset space ~
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14874 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14875 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14880 \begin_inset Index idx
14883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14884 File formats ! LaTeX
14892 \begin_layout Standard
14893 This file type has the extension
14894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14905 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14907 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14908 it manually with console commands.
14909 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14910 you view or export your document.
14913 \begin_layout Standard
14914 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14916 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14917 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14932 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14933 \begin_inset space ~
14937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14939 reference "sub:Export"
14946 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14948 \begin_inset Index idx
14951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14960 \begin_layout Standard
14961 This file type has the extension
14962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14982 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14983 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14984 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14988 \begin_layout Standard
14989 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14990 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14991 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14992 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14993 when you view the DVI.
14994 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14997 \begin_layout Standard
14998 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15000 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15001 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15006 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15007 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15009 \begin_inset space ~
15016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15026 The latter option uses the program
15035 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15036 font access (see section
15037 \begin_inset space ~
15041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15043 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15048 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15049 standard TeX processor.
15052 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15054 \begin_inset Index idx
15057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15058 File formats ! PostScript
15066 \begin_layout Standard
15067 This file type has the extension
15068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15080 PostScript was developed by the company
15084 as a printer language.
15085 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15087 PostScript can be seen as a
15088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15091 programming language
15092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15095 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15100 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15106 \begin_inset Index idx
15109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15110 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15120 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15123 \begin_layout Standard
15124 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15128 Encapsulated PostScript
15129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15132 (EPS, file extension
15133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15145 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15146 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15147 If, for example, you have 50
15148 \begin_inset space ~
15151 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15152 \begin_inset space ~
15155 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15156 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15157 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15158 EPS to avoid this problem.
15161 \begin_layout Standard
15162 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15164 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15165 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15173 \begin_inset Index idx
15176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15183 \begin_inset Index idx
15186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15196 This file type has the extension
15197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15213 Portable Document Format
15214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15221 was derived from PostScript.
15222 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15231 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15232 looks exactly the same.
15235 \begin_layout Standard
15236 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15240 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15244 (JPG, file extension
15245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15272 Portable Network Graphics
15273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15276 (PNG, file extension
15277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15289 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15290 background to one of these formats.
15291 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15292 will slow down your workflow.
15293 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15296 \begin_layout Standard
15297 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15299 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15305 \begin_layout Description
15307 \begin_inset space ~
15310 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15314 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15317 \begin_layout Description
15319 \begin_inset space ~
15326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15333 X) This uses the program
15337 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15342 is a new engine, derived from
15346 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15347 access (see section
15348 \begin_inset space ~
15352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15354 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15359 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15360 standard TeX processor.
15363 \begin_layout Description
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15379 X) This uses the program
15383 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15388 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15389 font access (see section
15390 \begin_inset space ~
15394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15396 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15401 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15402 vertically written Japanese.
15405 \begin_layout Description
15407 \begin_inset space ~
15410 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15414 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15418 \begin_layout Description
15420 \begin_inset space ~
15423 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15427 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15428 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15432 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15433 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15436 \begin_layout Standard
15440 \begin_inset space ~
15449 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15450 works without problems.
15451 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15452 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15456 \begin_inset space ~
15463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15475 \begin_inset space ~
15482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15491 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15499 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15501 \begin_inset Index idx
15504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15505 FileFormats ! XHTML
15511 \begin_inset Index idx
15514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15523 \begin_layout Standard
15524 This file type has the extension
15525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15537 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15538 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15539 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15540 suitable for the purpose.
15541 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15543 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15544 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15547 between different formats, which are described in section
15549 Math Output in XHTML
15554 \begin_inset space ~
15562 \begin_layout Standard
15563 XHTML output remains
15564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15571 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15574 LyX and the World Wide Web
15578 Additional Features
15580 manual, for more information.
15583 \begin_layout Standard
15584 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15586 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15587 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15593 \begin_layout Subsection
15595 \begin_inset Index idx
15598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15607 \begin_layout Standard
15608 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15609 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15618 or use the toolbar button
15625 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15626 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15633 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15637 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15645 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15650 Further output formats can be selected via
15652 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15653 View (Other Formats)
15655 or the toolbar button
15656 \begin_inset Graphics
15657 filename ../images/view-others.png
15659 groupId toolbarbuttons
15666 \begin_layout Standard
15667 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15668 viewer window using the menu
15670 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15675 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15676 Update (Other Formats)
15681 \begin_layout Standard
15682 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15684 To have a real output, export your document.
15687 \begin_layout Subsection
15688 Printing the File from within LyX
15689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15691 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15698 \begin_layout Standard
15699 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15700 it directly from within LyX.
15701 To print a file, select the menu
15703 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15709 arg "dialog-show print"
15712 ) or click on the toolbar button
15715 arg "dialog-show print"
15719 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15720 This file is then processed by the program
15724 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15729 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15732 \begin_layout Standard
15733 You can set the following print parameters in the
15736 \begin_inset space ~
15744 \begin_layout Labeling
15745 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15750 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15755 Note that this printer name is for the program
15764 has to be configured for this printer name.
15765 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15766 \begin_inset space ~
15770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15772 reference "sub:Printer"
15781 The printer should understand PostScript.
15784 \begin_layout Labeling
15785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15790 The name of a file to print to.
15791 The output will be a PostScript file.
15792 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15796 \begin_layout Standard
15797 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15798 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15799 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15800 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15801 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15802 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15803 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15806 \begin_layout Section
15807 A few Words about Typography
15808 \begin_inset Index idx
15811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15820 \begin_layout Subsection
15821 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15822 \begin_inset Index idx
15825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15832 \begin_inset Index idx
15835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15844 \begin_layout Standard
15846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15857 character comes in four lengths: the
15869 , and the minus sign:
15870 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15876 \begin_layout Standard
15877 \begin_inset Tabular
15878 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15879 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15880 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15881 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15882 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15883 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15912 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15952 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15977 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15979 \begin_inset space ~
15982 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15989 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16014 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16016 \begin_inset space ~
16019 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16040 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16074 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16080 \begin_layout Standard
16081 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16093 character multiple times in a row.
16094 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16095 the final output, but not in LyX.
16097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16127 \begin_layout Standard
16128 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16129 math mode and has a length of its own.
16130 Here are some examples:
16133 \begin_layout Enumerate
16134 line- and page-breaks
16135 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16145 \begin_layout Enumerate
16147 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16157 \begin_layout Enumerate
16158 Oh — there's a dash.
16159 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16169 \begin_layout Enumerate
16170 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16174 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16184 \begin_layout Subsection
16186 \begin_inset Index idx
16189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16198 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16205 \begin_layout Standard
16206 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16207 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16212 \begin_inset Index idx
16215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16216 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16221 following the rules of the document language.
16224 \begin_layout Standard
16225 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16230 font and with unusual constructs, like
16231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16239 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16241 This is done with the menu
16243 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16244 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16246 \begin_inset space ~
16252 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16253 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16256 \begin_layout Standard
16257 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16258 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16268 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16276 as a hyphenation possibility.
16277 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16278 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16279 as described in section
16280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16283 Prevent Hyphenation
16284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16290 \begin_inset space ~
16298 \begin_layout Subsection
16300 \begin_inset Index idx
16303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16313 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16316 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16323 \begin_layout Standard
16324 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16325 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16326 LaTeX then adds the
16327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16330 appropriate amount of space.
16331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16334 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16336 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16337 gets after another word.
16340 \begin_layout Standard
16341 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16342 not work in all cases.
16344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16355 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16356 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16359 \begin_layout Standard
16360 Here are some examples of
16364 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16367 \begin_layout Itemize
16372 \begin_layout Itemize
16377 \begin_layout Standard
16378 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16381 \begin_layout Itemize
16383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16387 this is too much space!
16390 \begin_layout Itemize
16395 \begin_layout Standard
16396 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16399 \begin_layout Standard
16400 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16403 \begin_layout Enumerate
16407 \begin_inset space ~
16412 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16413 \begin_inset space ~
16417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16419 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16424 \begin_inset Index idx
16427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16428 Spaces ! inter-word
16436 \begin_layout Enumerate
16440 \begin_inset space ~
16445 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16446 \begin_inset space ~
16450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16452 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16457 \begin_inset Index idx
16460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16469 \begin_layout Enumerate
16473 \begin_inset space ~
16477 \begin_inset space ~
16481 \begin_inset space ~
16488 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16490 \begin_inset space ~
16495 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16496 This function is also bound to
16499 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16505 \begin_layout Standard
16506 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16509 \begin_layout Itemize
16511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16515 \begin_inset space \space{}
16518 this is too much space!
16521 \begin_layout Itemize
16522 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16526 \begin_layout Standard
16527 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16528 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16529 will take care of this.
16532 \begin_layout Standard
16533 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16537 \begin_inset space ~
16542 feature described in the section
16548 Additional Features
16553 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16555 \begin_inset Index idx
16558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16559 Typography ! Quotes
16565 \begin_inset Index idx
16568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16599 \begin_layout Standard
16600 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16601 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16602 and use a closing quote at the end.
16604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16612 The keyboard character,
16616 , generates this automatically.
16619 \begin_layout Standard
16620 You can specify what character the
16624 key produces using the submenu
16630 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16634 \begin_inset Index idx
16637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16638 Document ! Settings
16648 There are six choices:
16651 \begin_layout Labeling
16652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16675 \begin_layout Labeling
16676 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16679 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16683 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16689 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16693 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16699 \begin_layout Labeling
16700 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16703 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16707 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16713 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16717 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16723 \begin_layout Labeling
16724 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16727 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16731 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16737 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16741 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16747 \begin_layout Labeling
16748 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16751 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16755 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16761 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16765 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16771 \begin_layout Labeling
16772 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16775 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16779 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16785 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16789 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16795 \begin_layout Standard
16796 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16799 arg "quote-insert single"
16805 \begin_layout Subsection
16807 \begin_inset Index idx
16810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16811 Typography ! Ligatures
16817 \begin_inset Index idx
16820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16851 name "sub:Ligatures"
16858 \begin_layout Standard
16859 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16860 print them as single characters.
16861 These groups are known as
16866 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16868 Here are the standard ligatures:
16871 \begin_layout Itemize
16875 \begin_layout Itemize
16879 \begin_layout Itemize
16883 \begin_layout Itemize
16887 \begin_layout Itemize
16891 \begin_layout Standard
16892 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16895 \begin_layout Standard
16896 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16897 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16905 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16921 To break a ligature, use
16923 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16924 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16926 \begin_inset space ~
16933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16944 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16961 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16969 \begin_layout Subsection
16971 \begin_inset Index idx
16974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16983 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16990 \begin_layout Standard
16991 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16992 characters in different sizes and positions.
16993 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16994 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17014 \begin_inset Note Note
17017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17018 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17019 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17024 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17025 following proper names:
17028 \begin_layout Description
17029 LyX The name of the game, write
17030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17051 \begin_layout Description
17052 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17074 \begin_layout Description
17075 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17097 \begin_layout Description
17098 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17120 \begin_layout Standard
17121 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17126 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17134 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17135 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17136 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17139 : The actual version is
17140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17147 , the previous one was
17148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17158 \begin_layout Standard
17159 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17160 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17161 In LyX this will look like
17162 \begin_inset Graphics
17163 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17169 \begin_inset Newline newline
17172 For more about TeX Code, see section
17173 \begin_inset space ~
17177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17179 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17186 \begin_layout Subsection
17188 \begin_inset Index idx
17191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17200 \begin_layout Standard
17201 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17202 space between two words.
17203 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17213 for units use the menu
17215 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17216 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17218 \begin_inset space ~
17226 arg "space-insert thin"
17232 \begin_layout Standard
17233 Here is an example to show the differences:
17236 \begin_layout Standard
17237 \begin_inset Tabular
17238 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17239 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17240 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17241 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17248 \begin_inset space ~
17252 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17264 space between number and unit
17271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17280 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17292 half space between number and unit
17305 \begin_layout Subsection
17307 \begin_inset Index idx
17310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17311 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17319 \begin_layout Standard
17320 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17322 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17323 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17324 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17325 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17326 These bits of text became known as
17337 \begin_layout Standard
17338 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17339 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17340 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17341 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17342 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17343 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17344 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17345 \begin_inset Newline newline
17353 \begin_inset Newline newline
17361 \begin_inset Newline newline
17364 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17365 Some LaTeX books (such as
17366 \begin_inset space ~
17370 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17372 key "latexcompanion"
17377 \begin_inset space ~
17381 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17387 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17391 \begin_layout Chapter
17392 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17395 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17402 \begin_layout Standard
17403 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17406 \begin_inset space ~
17412 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17415 \begin_layout Section
17417 \begin_inset Index idx
17420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17436 \begin_layout Standard
17437 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17440 \begin_layout Description
17442 \begin_inset space ~
17445 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17446 \begin_inset Newline newline
17450 \begin_inset Note Note
17453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17454 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17462 \begin_layout Description
17463 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17464 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17466 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17467 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17480 \begin_inset space ~
17486 \begin_inset Newline newline
17490 \begin_inset Note Comment
17493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17494 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17502 \begin_layout Description
17504 \begin_inset space ~
17507 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17508 set in the document settings under
17510 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17512 \begin_inset space ~
17518 \begin_inset Newline newline
17522 \begin_inset Newline newline
17526 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17535 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17536 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17541 of a comment that appears in the output.
17547 \begin_inset Newline newline
17551 \begin_inset Newline newline
17554 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17557 \begin_layout Standard
17558 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17566 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17570 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17573 \begin_layout Section
17575 \begin_inset Index idx
17578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17587 name "sec:Footnotes"
17594 \begin_layout Standard
17595 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17598 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17601 or the toolbar button
17604 arg "footnote-insert"
17616 \begin_inset Graphics
17617 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17626 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17655 label, the box will
17659 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17660 Clicking on the box label again will close
17673 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17674 and click on the footnote
17689 \begin_layout Standard
17690 Here is an example footnote:
17698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17699 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17707 \begin_layout Standard
17708 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17709 position where the footnote box is placed.
17710 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17711 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17712 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17713 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17718 ey are described in the
17721 \begin_inset space ~
17729 \begin_layout Section
17731 \begin_inset Index idx
17734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17743 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17750 \begin_layout Standard
17751 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17752 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17754 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17756 \begin_inset space ~
17761 or the toolbar button
17764 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17790 appearing within your text.
17791 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17800 \begin_layout Standard
17801 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17805 \begin_inset Marginal
17808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17810 This is a marginal note.
17818 \begin_layout Standard
17819 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17820 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17821 pages, right on odd pages.
17824 \begin_layout Standard
17825 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17828 \begin_inset space ~
17836 \begin_inset space ~
17844 \begin_layout Section
17845 Graphics and Images
17846 \begin_inset Index idx
17849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17856 \begin_inset Index idx
17859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17868 name "sec:Graphics"
17875 \begin_layout Standard
17876 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17877 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17880 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17885 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17889 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17892 \begin_layout Standard
17893 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17898 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17899 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17901 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17902 \begin_inset space ~
17906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17908 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17915 \begin_layout Standard
17920 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17921 of the image in the output.
17922 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17926 \begin_inset space ~
17930 \begin_inset space ~
17939 \begin_inset space ~
17943 \begin_inset space ~
17947 \begin_inset space ~
17952 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17953 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17976 \begin_inset space ~
17980 \begin_inset space ~
17987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17996 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17997 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18001 \begin_inset space ~
18006 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18007 with the image size is printed.
18011 \begin_inset space ~
18015 \begin_inset space ~
18019 \begin_inset space ~
18024 is explained in the
18027 \begin_inset space ~
18039 \begin_layout Standard
18040 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18041 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18043 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18046 \begin_layout Standard
18048 \begin_inset Graphics
18049 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18057 \begin_layout Standard
18058 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18059 the image into a float, see section
18060 \begin_inset space ~
18064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18066 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18073 \begin_layout Subsection
18075 \begin_inset Index idx
18078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18087 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18094 \begin_layout Standard
18095 You can insert images in any known file format.
18096 But as we explained in section
18097 \begin_inset space ~
18101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18103 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18107 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18108 LyX therefore uses the program
18112 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18113 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18114 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18115 \begin_inset space ~
18119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18121 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18128 \begin_layout Standard
18129 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18132 \begin_layout Description
18134 \begin_inset space ~
18137 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18138 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18139 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18143 Graphics Interchange Format
18144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18147 (GIF, file extension
18148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18160 \begin_inset Index idx
18163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18195 Portable Network Graphics
18196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18199 (PNG, file extension
18200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18212 \begin_inset Index idx
18215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18247 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18251 (JPG, file extension
18252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18276 \begin_inset Index idx
18279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18310 \begin_layout Description
18312 \begin_inset space ~
18315 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18317 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18318 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18319 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18320 \begin_inset Newline newline
18323 Scalable image formats can be
18324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18327 Scalable Vector Graphics
18328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18331 (SVG, file extension
18332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18344 \begin_inset Index idx
18347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18379 Encapsulated PostScript
18380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18383 (EPS, file extension
18384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18396 \begin_inset Index idx
18399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18431 Portable Document Format
18432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18435 (PDF, file extension
18436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18448 \begin_inset Index idx
18451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18466 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18467 result will not be scalable.
18468 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18474 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18482 \begin_layout Standard
18483 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18490 \begin_layout Subsection
18491 Grouping of Image Settings
18492 \begin_inset Index idx
18495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18496 Images ! Settings grouping
18504 \begin_layout Standard
18505 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18507 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18508 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18510 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18511 need to manually change each of them.
18515 \begin_layout Standard
18516 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18519 \begin_inset space ~
18523 \begin_inset space ~
18538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18546 \begin_inset space ~
18550 \begin_inset space ~
18557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18568 and checking the name of the desired group.
18571 \begin_layout Section
18573 \begin_inset Index idx
18576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18592 \begin_layout Standard
18593 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18596 arg "tabular-insert"
18601 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18605 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18606 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18607 from the rest of the table.
18608 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18609 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18611 Here is an example table:
18614 \begin_layout Standard
18616 \begin_inset Tabular
18617 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18618 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18619 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18620 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18621 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18622 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18822 \begin_layout Subsection
18826 \begin_layout Standard
18827 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18830 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18834 This brings up the table dialog.
18835 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18836 cursor is placed currently.
18837 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18838 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18839 done on all of your selection.
18842 \begin_layout Standard
18843 In addition to the table dialog, the
18846 \begin_inset space ~
18851 helps you in setting table properties.
18852 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18855 \begin_layout Standard
18859 \begin_inset space ~
18864 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18865 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18866 current cell respectively.
18867 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18869 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18870 of text, see section
18871 \begin_inset space ~
18875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18877 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18884 \begin_layout Standard
18885 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18886 using the check box
18895 This will merge the cells to
18899 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18900 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18901 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18902 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18903 in the last row without the upper border:
18906 \begin_layout Standard
18908 \begin_inset Tabular
18909 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18910 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18912 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18913 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18914 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18925 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18934 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19010 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19045 \begin_layout Standard
19046 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19047 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19048 explained in the chapter
19055 \begin_inset space ~
19061 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
19062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19065 degrees counterclockwise.
19066 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19069 \begin_layout Standard
19070 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19078 Most DVI-viewers are
19082 able to display rotations.
19090 \begin_layout Standard
19095 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19100 adds lines for all cell borders.
19103 \begin_layout Subsection
19105 \begin_inset Index idx
19108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19109 Tables ! Longtables
19115 \begin_inset Index idx
19118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19127 \begin_layout Standard
19128 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19131 \begin_inset space ~
19135 \begin_inset space ~
19144 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19145 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19148 \begin_layout Description
19153 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19154 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19155 except for the first page, if
19158 \begin_inset space ~
19166 \begin_layout Description
19170 \begin_inset space ~
19175 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19176 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19179 \begin_layout Description
19184 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19185 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19186 except for the last page, if
19189 \begin_inset space ~
19197 \begin_layout Description
19201 \begin_inset space ~
19206 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19207 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19210 \begin_layout Description
19211 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19212 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19214 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19218 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19221 \begin_inset space ~
19229 \begin_layout Standard
19230 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19231 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19232 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19238 In this context, first means first in this order:
19241 \begin_inset space ~
19253 \begin_inset space ~
19258 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19261 \begin_layout Standard
19263 \begin_inset Tabular
19264 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19265 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19266 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19267 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19268 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19269 <row endfirsthead="true">
19270 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19276 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19281 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19290 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19300 <row endfirsthead="true">
19301 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19312 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19321 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19333 <row endhead="true">
19334 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19345 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19354 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19364 <row endhead="true">
19365 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19376 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19385 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19397 <row endfoot="true">
19398 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19409 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19418 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19449 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20408 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20481 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20636 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20729 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20822 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20853 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20946 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21008 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21070 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21287 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <row endlastfoot="true">
21380 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21400 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 \begin_layout Subsection
21419 \begin_inset Index idx
21422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21431 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21438 \begin_layout Standard
21439 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21440 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21441 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21442 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21446 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21449 \begin_layout Standard
21450 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21451 for the column in the table dialog.
21452 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21453 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21457 \begin_layout Standard
21459 \begin_inset Tabular
21460 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21461 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21462 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21463 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21464 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21484 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21553 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 This is longer now.
21614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21665 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21666 This is longer now.
21671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 \begin_layout Standard
21698 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21699 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21704 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21705 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21711 Selection with the mouse or with
21715 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21716 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21717 the selection from outside the table.
21720 \begin_layout Section
21722 \begin_inset Index idx
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21741 \begin_layout Subsection
21745 \begin_layout Standard
21746 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21747 have a fixed location.
21749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21756 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21764 \begin_inset space ~
21769 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21770 too many notes on the current page.
21773 \begin_layout Standard
21774 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21775 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21776 and pages without text.
21777 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21778 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21779 Floats are therefore numbered.
21780 Referencing is described in section
21781 \begin_inset space ~
21785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21787 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21794 \begin_layout Standard
21795 To insert a float, use the menu
21797 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21801 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21802 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21804 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21805 \begin_inset Index idx
21808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21814 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21815 paragraph within the float.
21816 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21817 by left-clicking on the box label.
21818 A closed float box looks like this:
21819 \begin_inset Graphics
21820 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21825 – a gray button with a red label.
21828 \begin_layout Standard
21829 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21830 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21833 \begin_layout Subsection
21835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21837 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21842 \begin_inset Index idx
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 Floats ! Figure floats
21854 \begin_layout Standard
21856 \begin_inset space ~
21860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21862 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21866 was created using the menu
21868 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21869 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21875 arg "float-insert figure"
21879 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21882 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21888 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21892 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21893 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21895 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21897 \begin_inset space ~
21905 arg "layout-paragraph"
21911 \begin_layout Standard
21912 \begin_inset Float figure
21917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 \begin_inset Graphics
21920 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21935 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21939 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21952 \begin_layout Standard
21953 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21954 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21956 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21965 ) and refer to it using the menu
21967 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21973 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21977 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21978 vague references like
21979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21986 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21996 For more about cross-references, see section
21997 \begin_inset space ~
22001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22003 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22010 \begin_layout Standard
22011 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22012 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22013 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22014 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22015 as described in section
22016 \begin_inset space ~
22020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22022 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22028 \begin_inset space ~
22032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22034 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22038 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22039 You can also set the images one below the other.
22041 \begin_inset space ~
22045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22047 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22054 reference "fig:Platypus"
22058 are the subfigures.
22061 \begin_layout Standard
22062 \begin_inset Float figure
22067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22068 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22072 \begin_inset Float figure
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22078 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22083 name "fig:Undefinable"
22095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22096 \begin_inset Graphics
22097 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22108 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22112 \begin_inset Float figure
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22123 name "fig:Platypus"
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 \begin_inset Graphics
22137 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22149 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22161 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22165 Two distorted images.
22178 \begin_layout Subsection
22180 \begin_inset Index idx
22183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 Floats ! Table floats
22192 \begin_layout Standard
22193 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22195 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22196 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22199 or the toolbar button
22202 arg "float-insert table"
22206 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22207 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22208 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22210 \begin_inset space ~
22214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22216 reference "tab:Table-float"
22223 \begin_layout Standard
22224 \begin_inset Float table
22229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22230 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22235 name "tab:Table-float"
22247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 \begin_inset Tabular
22250 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22251 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22252 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22253 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22254 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22402 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22405 \end{array}\right]$
22413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22447 \begin_layout Subsection
22449 \begin_inset Index idx
22452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 \begin_layout Standard
22462 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22463 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22464 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22466 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22474 \begin_inset space ~
22482 \begin_layout Section
22484 \begin_inset Index idx
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22496 \begin_layout Standard
22497 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22499 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22500 \begin_inset space \space{}
22507 \begin_layout Standard
22508 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22510 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22514 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22515 and its alignment within the page.
22518 \begin_layout Standard
22520 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22530 height_special "totalheight"
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 This is a minipage.
22537 The text is set in an italic style.
22540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22543 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22544 another formatting.
22552 \begin_layout Standard
22553 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22556 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22560 as described in section
22561 \begin_inset space ~
22565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22567 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22572 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22578 \begin_layout Standard
22579 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22589 height_special "totalheight"
22592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22594 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22600 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22604 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22614 height_special "totalheight"
22617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22619 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22627 \begin_layout Standard
22628 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22634 \begin_layout Standard
22635 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22637 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22644 \begin_inset space ~
22652 \begin_layout Chapter
22653 Mathematical Formulas
22654 \begin_inset Index idx
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22664 \begin_inset Index idx
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22698 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22705 \begin_layout Standard
22706 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22711 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22714 \begin_layout Section
22716 \begin_inset Index idx
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22728 \begin_layout Standard
22729 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22742 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22744 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22745 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22746 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22748 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22754 \begin_layout Standard
22755 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22759 \begin_inset space ~
22764 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22767 \begin_layout Standard
22768 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22769 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22772 \begin_layout Standard
22773 This is a line with an inline formula
22774 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22780 \begin_layout Standard
22781 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22782 paragraph, like this one:
22783 \begin_inset Formula
22790 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22793 \begin_layout Standard
22794 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22795 For example, typing
22796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22809 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22810 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22814 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22817 \begin_inset space ~
22825 \begin_layout Subsection
22826 Navigating in Formulas
22827 \begin_inset Index idx
22830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22839 \begin_layout Standard
22840 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22841 achieved with the arrow keys.
22842 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22843 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22848 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22849 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22853 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22857 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22860 \end{array}\right]$
22868 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22873 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22874 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22877 \begin_layout Standard
22882 , printed in this document as
22883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22887 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22894 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22895 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22896 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22901 For example, if you want
22902 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22910 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22920 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22924 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22929 , since in the latter case only the
22932 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22937 will be under the square root sign:
22938 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22944 \begin_layout Standard
22945 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22947 \begin_inset Formula
22949 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22958 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22959 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22962 \begin_layout Subsection
22966 \begin_layout Standard
22967 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22968 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22972 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22973 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22974 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22975 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22976 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22979 \begin_layout Subsection
22980 Exponents and Subscripts
22981 \begin_inset Index idx
22984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22991 \begin_inset Index idx
22994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23003 \begin_layout Standard
23004 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23007 arg "math-superscript"
23013 arg "math-subscript"
23016 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23018 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23021 , type in a formula
23024 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23034 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23040 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23044 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23050 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23056 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23065 , you have to use an extra
23069 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23070 For example, if you want
23071 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23077 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23083 Subscripts are similar: To get
23084 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23090 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23098 \begin_layout Subsection
23100 \begin_inset Index idx
23103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23112 \begin_layout Standard
23113 Create a fraction either with the command
23119 or by using the icon
23122 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23128 \begin_inset space ~
23134 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23135 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23136 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23141 To move back up, press
23146 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23147 \begin_inset Formula
23149 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23152 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23160 \begin_layout Subsection
23162 \begin_inset Index idx
23165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23174 \begin_layout Standard
23175 Roots can be created using the
23178 \begin_inset space ~
23186 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23192 arg "math-insert \\root"
23214 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23220 always produces a square root.
23223 \begin_layout Subsection
23224 Operators with Limits
23225 \begin_inset Index idx
23228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23235 \begin_inset Index idx
23238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23247 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23254 \begin_layout Standard
23256 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23260 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23263 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23264 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23265 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23266 The sum operator will automatically place its
23267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23274 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23276 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23280 \begin_inset Formula
23282 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23287 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23291 \begin_layout Standard
23292 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23294 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23295 behind the operator and using the menu
23297 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23298 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23300 \begin_inset space ~
23304 \begin_inset space ~
23318 \begin_layout Standard
23319 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23328 \begin_inset Index idx
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 \begin_inset Formula
23340 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23345 which will place the
23346 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23358 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23359 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23365 \begin_layout Standard
23366 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23373 Have a look at section
23374 \begin_inset space ~
23378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23380 reference "sub:Functions"
23384 for an explanation of function macros.
23387 \begin_layout Subsection
23389 \begin_inset Index idx
23392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 \begin_layout Standard
23402 Most math symbols can be found in the
23405 \begin_inset space ~
23410 under one of several categories; including
23427 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23431 \begin_layout Standard
23432 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23433 you don't have to use the
23436 \begin_inset space ~
23441 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23442 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23445 \begin_layout Subsection
23447 \begin_inset Index idx
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 \begin_layout Standard
23460 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23465 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23471 \begin_inset space ~
23479 arg "math-insert \\space"
23483 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23484 For example, the sequence
23489 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23493 \begin_inset Graphics
23494 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23499 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23500 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23501 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23502 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23504 Here are two examples:
23507 \begin_layout Standard
23517 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23523 \begin_layout Standard
23533 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23539 \begin_layout Subsection
23541 \begin_inset Index idx
23544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23553 name "sub:Functions"
23560 \begin_layout Standard
23564 \begin_inset space ~
23569 contains under the button
23572 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23575 a number of function macros, such as
23576 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23580 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23588 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23595 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23596 avoid confusions, because
23597 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23601 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23607 \begin_layout Standard
23608 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23610 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23614 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23620 \begin_layout Standard
23621 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23622 are placed, as described in section
23623 \begin_inset space ~
23627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23629 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23636 \begin_layout Subsection
23638 \begin_inset Index idx
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 \begin_layout Standard
23651 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23653 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23654 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23655 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23658 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23659 Our example is entered by typing
23664 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23671 \begin_inset space ~
23675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23677 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23681 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23684 \begin_layout Standard
23685 \begin_inset Float table
23690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23691 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23696 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23700 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23710 \begin_inset Tabular
23711 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23712 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23713 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23714 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23715 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23853 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24177 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24276 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24297 \begin_layout Standard
24298 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24301 \begin_inset space ~
24309 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24312 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24316 \begin_layout Section
24317 Brackets and Delimiters
24318 \begin_inset Index idx
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24328 \begin_inset Index idx
24331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24340 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24347 \begin_layout Standard
24348 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24349 For some purposes, using just the keys
24354 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24355 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24356 toolbar delimiter icon
24359 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24363 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24364 \begin_inset Formula
24366 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24374 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24375 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24379 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24382 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24388 \begin_inset Formula
24390 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24398 \begin_layout Standard
24399 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24400 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24404 \begin_layout Standard
24405 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24406 left side and right side.
24407 If you use the option
24410 \begin_inset space ~
24415 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24416 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24417 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24422 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24425 \begin_layout Standard
24426 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24427 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24428 is to go inside the brackets.
24429 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24434 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24435 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24436 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24440 arg "math-delim ( )"
24446 \begin_layout Section
24447 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24448 \begin_inset Index idx
24451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24458 \begin_inset Index idx
24461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24468 \begin_inset Index idx
24471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24472 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24480 \begin_layout Standard
24481 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24484 \begin_inset space ~
24492 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24496 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24497 Here is an example:
24498 \begin_inset Formula
24500 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24509 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24510 \begin_inset space ~
24514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24516 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24521 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24522 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24523 This alignment is set in the box
24528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24576 for every column as default.
24577 For example, the sequence
24578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24589 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24590 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24591 corresponds to the relevant column.
24592 The result will look like this:
24593 \begin_inset Formula
24596 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24597 column & has & has\, right\\
24598 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24607 \begin_layout Standard
24608 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24611 arg "newline-insert newline"
24614 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24615 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24617 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24620 or the math toolbar.
24623 \begin_layout Standard
24624 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24625 It can be created with the menu
24627 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24628 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24630 \begin_inset space ~
24642 Here is an example:
24643 \begin_inset Formula
24657 \begin_layout Standard
24658 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24661 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24664 arg "newline-insert newline"
24668 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24673 arg "newline-insert newline"
24676 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24684 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24685 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24686 A new row is created by every further entry of
24689 arg "newline-insert newline"
24693 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24694 Here is an example:
24695 \begin_inset Formula
24697 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24698 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24703 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24704 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24705 \begin_inset Formula
24707 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24715 \begin_layout Standard
24716 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24723 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24724 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24727 reference "eq:asquared"
24732 The other types are described in section
24733 \begin_inset space ~
24737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24739 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24746 \begin_layout Section
24747 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24748 \begin_inset Index idx
24751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24752 Math ! Formula numbering
24758 \begin_inset Index idx
24761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 Math ! Referencing formulas
24768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24770 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24777 \begin_layout Standard
24778 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24780 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24781 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24783 \begin_inset space ~
24787 \begin_inset space ~
24795 arg "math-number-toggle"
24799 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24800 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24801 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24802 the document class.
24803 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24804 separated by a dot:
24805 \begin_inset Formula
24815 arg "math-number-toggle"
24818 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24819 You can only number displayed formulas.
24822 \begin_layout Standard
24823 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24825 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24826 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24828 \begin_inset space ~
24832 \begin_inset space ~
24840 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24843 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24844 \begin_inset Formula
24847 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24853 To number all lines use the shortcut
24856 arg "math-number-toggle"
24862 \begin_layout Standard
24863 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24866 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24867 A label is inserted with the menu
24869 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24878 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24879 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24880 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24892 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24893 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24894 We inserted in the following example the label
24895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24902 in the second line:
24903 \begin_inset Formula
24905 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24906 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24911 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24912 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24913 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24915 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24917 \begin_inset space ~
24925 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24929 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24930 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24931 as the formula number:
24934 \begin_layout Standard
24935 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24938 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24945 \begin_layout Standard
24946 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24947 \begin_inset space ~
24951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24953 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24958 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24966 \begin_layout Section
24967 User defined math macros
24968 \begin_inset Index idx
24971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 \begin_layout Standard
24981 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24982 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24983 Math macros are explained in section
24986 \begin_inset space ~
24998 \begin_layout Section
25002 \begin_layout Subsection
25004 \begin_inset Index idx
25007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 \begin_layout Standard
25017 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25018 To set a font in a formula, use the
25021 \begin_inset space ~
25029 arg "math-insert \\font"
25032 , or enter its command, listed in table
25033 \begin_inset space ~
25037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25039 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25046 \begin_layout Standard
25047 \begin_inset Float table
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25053 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25058 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25062 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25072 \begin_inset Tabular
25073 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25074 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25108 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25135 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25195 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25222 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25283 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25310 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25344 \begin_layout Standard
25345 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25353 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25369 \begin_layout Standard
25370 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25371 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25376 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25377 space when you need a space in the box.
25378 Here is an example where
25379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25390 denotes the set of numbers:
25391 \begin_inset Formula
25393 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25401 \begin_layout Standard
25402 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25403 You can, for example, put a character in
25412 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25416 \begin_inset Newline newline
25419 So it is better not to use this feature.
25422 \begin_layout Standard
25423 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25424 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25428 \begin_inset Newline newline
25431 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25437 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25438 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25444 \begin_layout Standard
25451 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25454 \begin_layout Standard
25455 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25457 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25458 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25460 \begin_inset space ~
25468 \begin_layout Subsection
25470 \begin_inset Index idx
25473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 \begin_layout Standard
25483 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25485 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25489 \begin_inset space ~
25493 \begin_inset space ~
25501 \begin_inset space ~
25509 arg "math-insert \\font"
25513 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25514 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25515 Here is an example:
25516 \begin_inset Formula
25519 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25520 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25529 \begin_layout Subsection
25531 \begin_inset Index idx
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25543 \begin_layout Standard
25544 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25545 automatically chosen in most situations.
25563 For most characters,
25571 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25572 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25577 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25578 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25580 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25583 arg "math-insert \\style"
25587 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25588 For example, you can set
25589 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25592 , which is normally in
25601 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25605 The four styles are used in the following example:
25608 \begin_layout Standard
25609 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25613 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25617 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25621 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25627 \begin_layout Standard
25628 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25629 is set in a particular size with the menu
25631 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25633 \begin_inset space ~
25638 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25639 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25640 will be adjusted to correspond.
25641 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25652 \begin_layout Standard
25656 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25662 \begin_layout Section
25664 \begin_inset Index idx
25667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25674 \begin_inset Index idx
25677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25686 \begin_layout Standard
25687 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25688 (AMS) that are in common use.
25691 \begin_layout Subsection
25692 Enabling AMS-Support
25695 \begin_layout Standard
25696 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25697 the document by selecting the checkbox
25700 \begin_inset space ~
25704 \begin_inset space ~
25708 \begin_inset space ~
25715 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25719 \begin_inset Index idx
25722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25723 Document ! Settings
25731 \begin_inset space ~
25737 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25738 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25741 \begin_layout Subsection
25743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25745 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25750 \begin_inset Index idx
25753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25754 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25762 \begin_layout Standard
25763 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25764 LyX allows you to choose between
25785 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25786 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25792 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25795 \begin_layout Chapter
25799 \begin_layout Section
25801 \begin_inset Index idx
25804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25813 name "sec:Cross-References"
25820 \begin_layout Standard
25821 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25822 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25824 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25825 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25826 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25829 \begin_layout Enumerate
25833 \begin_layout Enumerate
25834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25836 name "enu:Second-item"
25843 \begin_layout Enumerate
25847 \begin_layout Standard
25848 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25850 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25853 or by pressing the toolbar button
25860 A gray label box like this:
25861 \begin_inset Graphics
25862 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25867 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25868 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25903 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25904 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25920 \begin_layout Standard
25921 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25923 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25926 or the toolbar button
25929 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25933 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25934 \begin_inset Graphics
25935 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25940 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25942 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25955 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25959 \begin_layout Standard
25960 As an alternative to
25962 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25965 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25970 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25971 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25973 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25985 \begin_layout Standard
25986 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25987 \begin_inset space ~
25991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25993 reference "enu:Second-item"
26000 \begin_layout Standard
26001 It is recommended to use a protected space
26005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26006 described in section
26007 \begin_inset space ~
26011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26013 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26022 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26023 line breaks between them.
26026 \begin_layout Standard
26027 There are six formats of cross-references:
26030 \begin_layout Description
26031 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26034 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26041 \begin_layout Description
26042 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26043 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26055 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26062 \begin_layout Description
26063 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26064 \begin_inset space ~
26068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26069 LatexCommand pageref
26070 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26077 \begin_layout Description
26079 \begin_inset space ~
26083 \begin_inset space ~
26086 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26088 LatexCommand vpageref
26089 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26094 \begin_inset Newline newline
26097 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26098 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26099 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26100 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26101 it prints “on the next page”.
26102 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26105 \begin_layout Description
26107 \begin_inset space ~
26111 \begin_inset space ~
26115 \begin_inset space ~
26118 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26121 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26126 \begin_inset Newline newline
26129 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26135 ; otherwise it behaves like
26139 \begin_inset space ~
26143 \begin_inset space ~
26152 \begin_layout Description
26154 \begin_inset space ~
26157 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26158 \begin_inset Newline newline
26162 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26170 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26179 \begin_inset Index idx
26182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26183 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26189 \begin_inset Index idx
26192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26193 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26204 \begin_inset Newline newline
26207 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26210 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26214 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26215 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26223 is the default and preferred because
26227 supports only English documents.
26228 The format is specified by using the command
26240 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26241 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26254 ) can be done with this command
26255 \begin_inset Newline newline
26262 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26267 \begin_inset Newline newline
26270 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26272 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26274 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26281 \begin_layout Description
26283 \begin_inset space ~
26286 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26288 LatexCommand nameref
26289 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26296 \begin_layout Standard
26297 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26298 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26299 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26303 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26307 \begin_layout Standard
26308 You can only use the style
26312 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26316 is always possible.
26319 \begin_layout Standard
26320 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26321 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26323 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26324 \begin_inset space ~
26328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26330 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26337 \begin_layout Standard
26338 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26342 \begin_inset space ~
26346 \begin_inset space ~
26351 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26352 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26355 \begin_inset space ~
26360 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26361 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26364 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26370 \begin_layout Standard
26371 You can change labels at any time.
26372 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26373 do not need to think about this.
26376 \begin_layout Standard
26377 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26378 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26379 instead of the reference.
26382 \begin_layout Standard
26383 References are described in detail in the section
26384 \begin_inset space ~
26388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26398 \begin_inset space ~
26406 \begin_layout Section
26407 Table of Contents and other Listings
26408 \begin_inset Index idx
26411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26418 \begin_inset Index idx
26421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26437 \begin_layout Subsection
26439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26441 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26448 \begin_layout Standard
26449 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26451 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26452 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26454 \begin_inset space ~
26458 \begin_inset space ~
26464 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26465 If you click on it, the
26469 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26470 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26471 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26473 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26475 \begin_inset space ~
26480 that is described in section
26481 \begin_inset space ~
26485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26487 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26494 \begin_layout Standard
26495 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26496 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26498 \begin_inset space ~
26502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26504 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26508 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26510 \begin_inset space ~
26514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26516 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26520 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26522 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26525 \begin_layout Subsection
26526 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26529 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26536 \begin_layout Standard
26537 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26539 You can insert them via the
26541 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26545 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26548 \begin_layout Section
26549 URLs and Hyperlinks
26550 \begin_inset Index idx
26553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26560 \begin_inset Index idx
26563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 \begin_layout Subsection
26574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26583 \begin_layout Standard
26584 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26586 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26592 \begin_layout Standard
26593 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26594 \begin_inset Flex URL
26597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26607 \begin_layout Standard
26608 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26614 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26618 \begin_layout Standard
26619 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26627 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26635 \begin_layout Subsection
26637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26639 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26646 \begin_layout Standard
26647 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26649 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26652 or with the toolbar button
26659 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26668 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26669 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26670 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26672 name "LyX's homepage"
26673 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26677 , an Email address like this:
26678 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26680 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26681 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26686 , or a link to a file.
26689 \begin_layout Standard
26690 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26703 to the link target.
26706 \begin_layout Standard
26707 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26708 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26709 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26710 the text style dialog.
26711 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26715 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26717 name "LyX's homepage"
26718 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26725 \begin_layout Standard
26726 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26730 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26732 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26733 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26737 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26739 \begin_inset Newline newline
26747 \begin_inset Newline newline
26754 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26757 \begin_layout Section
26759 \begin_inset Index idx
26762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26771 name "sec:Appendices"
26778 \begin_layout Standard
26779 Appendices are created with the menu
26781 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26783 \begin_inset space ~
26787 \begin_inset space ~
26793 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26794 as the appendix part of the book.
26795 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26798 \begin_layout Standard
26799 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26800 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26801 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26802 and the subsection number.
26803 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26807 \begin_layout Standard
26809 \begin_inset space ~
26813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26815 reference "chap:Credits"
26820 \begin_inset space ~
26824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26826 reference "sub:Export"
26833 \begin_layout Section
26835 \begin_inset Index idx
26838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26847 name "sec:Bibliography"
26854 \begin_layout Standard
26855 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26856 You can include a bibliography database,
26860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26861 Known under the name
26862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26874 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26875 manually, using the paragraph environment
26879 , which was described in section
26880 \begin_inset space ~
26884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26886 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26891 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26892 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26896 use a bibliography database.
26899 \begin_layout Subsection
26900 The Bibliography Environment
26903 \begin_layout Standard
26908 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26910 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26919 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26921 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26930 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26933 \begin_layout Standard
26934 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26936 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26939 or the toolbar button
26942 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26946 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26947 containing the available citations.
26948 Select one or more keys from the list and
26958 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26959 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26963 \begin_layout Standard
26964 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26965 entry with surrounding brackets.
26970 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26971 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26983 \begin_layout Standard
26986 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26989 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26991 key "latexcompanion"
26998 \begin_layout Standard
26999 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27000 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27009 \begin_layout Standard
27010 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27013 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27015 \begin_inset space ~
27023 arg "layout-paragraph"
27027 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27030 \begin_layout Subsection
27031 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27032 \begin_inset Index idx
27035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27036 Bibliography ! Databases
27042 \begin_inset Index idx
27045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27046 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27054 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27061 \begin_layout Standard
27062 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27068 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27070 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27071 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27076 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27078 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27079 your working field in a database.
27080 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27081 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27082 list for that document.
27083 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27087 \begin_layout Standard
27088 The database is a text file with the file extension
27089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27100 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27101 The format is explained in
27102 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27108 and in the LaTeX books (
27109 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27111 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27116 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27117 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27118 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27119 \begin_inset Flex URL
27122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27124 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27132 \begin_layout Standard
27133 To use a database, use the menu
27135 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27140 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27153 \begin_inset space ~
27159 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27160 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27167 Add bibliography to TOC
27169 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27174 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27175 in the document or just the cited references.
27178 \begin_layout Standard
27179 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27191 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27192 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27193 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27195 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27201 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27202 \begin_inset Newline newline
27206 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27208 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27220 \begin_layout Standard
27221 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27224 \begin_layout Standard
27225 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27226 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27232 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27233 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27238 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27239 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27240 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27255 The following variants are possible:
27258 \begin_layout Description
27259 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27260 with other bibliography packages (e.
27261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27265 \begin_inset space \space{}
27272 ), only with the package
27276 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27280 \begin_layout Description
27281 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27282 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27283 with all bibliography packages, except
27288 \begin_layout Description
27289 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27294 , works with all bibliography packages
27297 \begin_layout Standard
27298 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27300 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27306 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27315 \begin_layout Standard
27316 When you select the option
27318 Sectioned bibliography
27322 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27323 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27326 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27327 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27329 Customizing Bibliographies
27337 Additional Features
27342 \begin_layout Standard
27343 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27344 the two methods of creating them.
27345 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27346 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27347 We used the style file
27351 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27354 \begin_layout Subsection
27355 Bibliography layout
27356 \begin_inset Index idx
27359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27360 Bibliography ! Layout
27368 \begin_layout Standard
27369 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27370 For this feature you need to enable the option
27376 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27380 \begin_inset Index idx
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27384 Document ! Settings
27394 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27395 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27396 in the previous section.
27399 \begin_layout Standard
27400 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27401 the citation reference window.
27402 Here is an example where the text
27403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27407 \begin_inset space ~
27411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27414 appears after the reference:
27417 \begin_layout Standard
27419 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27422 key "latexcompanion"
27429 \begin_layout Section
27431 \begin_inset Index idx
27434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27450 \begin_layout Standard
27451 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27453 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27455 \begin_inset space ~
27460 or the toolbar button
27467 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27468 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27469 by LyX as the index entry.
27472 \begin_layout Standard
27473 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27475 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27476 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27478 \begin_inset space ~
27484 A light blue box labeled
27485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27496 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27497 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27500 \begin_layout Standard
27501 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27502 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27504 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27506 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27513 \begin_layout Subsection
27514 Grouping Index Entries
27515 \begin_inset Index idx
27518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27527 \begin_layout Standard
27528 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27530 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27531 lists under the entry
27532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27540 First we create the entry
27541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27549 \begin_inset space ~
27553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27555 reference "sub:Lists"
27560 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27561 \begin_inset space ~
27565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27567 reference "sec:Itemize"
27571 , we insert the command
27574 \begin_layout Standard
27580 \begin_layout Standard
27584 \begin_layout Standard
27590 \begin_layout Standard
27591 for the enumerated list in section
27592 \begin_inset space ~
27596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27598 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27605 \begin_layout Standard
27606 The exclamation mark
27607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27614 marks the grouping levels.
27615 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27616 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27617 If we don't have an index entry for
27618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27625 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27628 \begin_layout Subsection
27630 \begin_inset Index idx
27633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27634 Index ! Page ranges
27642 \begin_layout Standard
27643 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27645 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27646 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27647 an index entry in section
27648 \begin_inset space ~
27652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27654 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27661 \begin_layout Standard
27664 Paragraph environments|(
27667 \begin_layout Standard
27668 and another entry at the end of section
27669 \begin_inset space ~
27673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27675 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27682 \begin_layout Standard
27685 Paragraph environments|)
27688 \begin_layout Standard
27690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27713 respectively start and end the index range.
27714 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27715 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27716 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27717 An example is the index entry
27718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27721 Document ! Settings
27722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27728 \begin_layout Subsection
27730 \begin_inset Index idx
27733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27734 Index ! Cross referencing
27742 \begin_layout Standard
27743 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27744 We referred for example in the index entry
27745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27753 \begin_inset space ~
27757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27759 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27763 ) to the index entry
27764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27771 in the same section using the entry
27774 \begin_layout Standard
27777 GIF|see{Image formats}
27780 \begin_layout Standard
27781 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27782 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27783 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27786 \begin_layout Subsection
27788 \begin_inset Index idx
27791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27792 Index ! Entry order
27800 \begin_layout Standard
27801 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27802 follow the rules for the index order.
27803 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27808 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27810 \begin_inset space ~
27814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27816 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27825 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27826 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27851 \begin_inset Index idx
27854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27855 Dummy entries ! maïs
27861 \begin_inset Index idx
27864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27865 Dummy entries ! maître
27871 \begin_inset Index idx
27874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27875 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27880 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27881 maïs, maison, maître.
27882 To achieve this, we use the command
27885 \begin_layout Standard
27888 previous entry@current entry
27891 \begin_layout Standard
27892 In our case we want to have
27893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27908 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27911 \begin_layout Standard
27917 \begin_layout Standard
27918 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27919 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27920 See the next subsection for an example.
27923 \begin_layout Standard
27924 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27930 \begin_layout Standard
27931 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27936 to generate the index (see sec.
27937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27943 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27952 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27960 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27964 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27965 index commands start with
27966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27978 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27983 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27986 \begin_layout Standard
27998 \begin_layout Standard
28010 \begin_layout Subsection
28012 \begin_inset Index idx
28015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28016 Index ! Entry layout
28024 \begin_layout Standard
28025 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28026 \begin_inset Index idx
28029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28032 This is an italic dummy entry
28037 You can also format the page number using the character
28038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28045 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28046 We can write for example
28049 \begin_layout Standard
28052 italic page number:|textit
28055 \begin_layout Standard
28056 to get the page number in italic.
28057 \begin_inset Index idx
28060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28061 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28066 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28084 \begin_inset space ~
28090 Have a look at section
28091 \begin_inset space ~
28095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28097 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28101 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28104 \begin_layout Standard
28105 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28113 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28117 to generate the index, see sec.
28118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28124 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28133 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28138 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28139 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28142 key "latexcompanion"
28154 \begin_layout Standard
28155 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28157 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28158 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28159 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28160 If so, put the following in the preamble
28163 \begin_layout Standard
28175 \begin_layout Standard
28179 \begin_layout Standard
28185 \begin_layout Standard
28186 in the index entry.
28187 \begin_inset Index idx
28190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28191 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28196 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28197 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28198 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28201 \begin_layout Standard
28202 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28203 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28204 a bold font for all index entries.
28205 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28217 documentation for details,
28218 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28220 key "makeindex,xindy"
28227 \begin_layout Subsection
28229 \begin_inset Index idx
28232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28241 name "sub:Index-Program"
28248 \begin_layout Standard
28249 If the index generation program
28253 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28257 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28266 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28267 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28268 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28269 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28270 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28280 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28281 dialog, see section
28282 \begin_inset space ~
28286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28288 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28293 The available options are listed and explained in
28294 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28296 key "makeindex,xindy"
28301 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28305 \begin_layout Standard
28306 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28307 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28310 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28311 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28315 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28316 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28319 \begin_layout Subsection
28323 \begin_layout Standard
28324 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28325 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28333 next to the standard index.
28334 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28335 that add this feature.
28341 \begin_inset Index idx
28344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28345 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28350 package to generate multiple indexes.
28351 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28356 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28357 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28364 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28365 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28366 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28374 \begin_layout Standard
28375 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28377 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28378 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28381 and select the option
28383 Use multiple Indexes
28390 already contains the standard index
28391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28399 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28400 also appear as a heading) to the
28404 input field and press the
28409 The new index now also appears in the list.
28410 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28414 \begin_layout Standard
28415 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28418 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28425 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28426 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28427 are additional features:
28430 \begin_layout Itemize
28431 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28432 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28435 \begin_layout Itemize
28436 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28437 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28445 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28446 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28447 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28448 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28451 \begin_layout Section
28452 Nomenclature/Glossary
28453 \begin_inset Index idx
28456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28463 \begin_inset Index idx
28466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28497 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28504 \begin_layout Standard
28505 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28506 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28507 called nomenclature or glossary.
28510 \begin_layout Standard
28511 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28517 \begin_inset Index idx
28520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28521 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28527 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28528 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28534 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28537 \begin_layout Standard
28538 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28539 and then use the menu
28541 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28547 \begin_inset space ~
28552 or the toolbar button
28555 arg "nomencl-insert"
28560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28571 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28574 \begin_layout Standard
28575 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28576 The first is the term or
28580 that you wish to define.
28585 of the term or symbol.
28588 \begin_layout Standard
28589 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28597 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28605 \begin_layout Subsection
28606 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28607 \begin_inset Index idx
28610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28611 Nomenclature ! Layout
28619 \begin_layout Standard
28620 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28624 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28630 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28638 \begin_inset Newline newline
28646 \begin_inset Newline newline
28652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28659 character starts/ends the formula.
28660 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28672 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28682 \begin_layout Standard
28683 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28684 \begin_inset space ~
28688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28690 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28697 \begin_layout Standard
28701 \begin_inset space ~
28706 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28707 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28712 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28719 in this document is:
28720 \begin_inset Newline newline
28725 dummy entry for the character
28730 \begin_inset Newline newline
28742 \begin_inset space ~
28752 font use the command
28781 \begin_layout Standard
28782 If the characters |
28783 \begin_inset space \space{}
28787 \begin_inset space \space{}
28791 \begin_inset space \space{}
28795 \begin_inset space \space{}
28799 \begin_inset space \space{}
28802 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28803 a quote character in front of them.
28804 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28805 LatexCommand nomenclature
28806 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28807 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28814 \begin_layout Subsection
28815 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28816 \begin_inset Index idx
28819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28820 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28828 \begin_layout Standard
28829 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28830 the symbol definition.
28831 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28833 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28836 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28837 LatexCommand nomenclature
28839 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28846 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28850 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28851 LatexCommand nomenclature
28854 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28859 They will be sorted by
28860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28886 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28889 will be sorted before the
28893 since the character
28894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28901 is considered in sorting.
28904 \begin_layout Standard
28905 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28908 \begin_inset space ~
28913 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28914 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28916 For the example given, you can insert
28920 in this field for the
28921 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28928 will be located before
28929 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28935 \begin_layout Standard
28936 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28941 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28950 \begin_layout Subsection
28951 Nomenclature Options
28952 \begin_inset Index idx
28955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28956 Nomenclature ! Options
28964 \begin_layout Standard
28969 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28970 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28973 \begin_layout Description
28974 refeq Appends the phrase
28975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28990 to every nomenclature entry, where
28996 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28999 \begin_layout Description
29000 refpage Appends the phrase
29001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29016 to every nomenclature entry, where
29022 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29025 \begin_layout Description
29026 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29029 \begin_layout Standard
29030 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29031 class options list in the
29033 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29037 In this document the options
29044 \begin_layout Standard
29045 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29051 \begin_layout Standard
29052 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29053 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29058 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29061 \begin_layout Description
29071 \begin_layout Description
29074 nomrefpage Like the
29081 \begin_layout Description
29084 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29093 \begin_layout Description
29097 \begin_inset space ~
29103 \begin_inset space ~
29108 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29111 \begin_layout Standard
29113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29120 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29121 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29124 \begin_layout Standard
29132 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29135 \begin_inset Newline newline
29142 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29147 \begin_inset Newline newline
29151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29166 by their translation.
29169 \begin_layout Subsection
29170 Printing the Nomenclature
29171 \begin_inset Index idx
29174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29175 Nomenclature ! Printing
29183 \begin_layout Standard
29184 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29186 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29187 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29203 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29204 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29205 You can choose between these settings:
29208 \begin_layout Description
29209 Default a space of 1
29210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29216 \begin_layout Description
29218 \begin_inset space ~
29222 \begin_inset space ~
29225 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29228 \begin_layout Description
29229 Custom custom space
29232 \begin_layout Standard
29233 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29242 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29250 For example, in order to change the name to
29254 , add the following line to the preamble:
29257 \begin_layout Standard
29265 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29268 \begin_layout Subsection
29269 Nomenclature Program
29270 \begin_inset Index idx
29273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29274 Nomenclature ! Program
29280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29282 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29289 \begin_layout Standard
29290 LyX uses the program
29294 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29295 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29300 by adding options, see section
29301 \begin_inset space ~
29305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29307 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29312 The available options are listed and explained in
29313 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29315 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29322 \begin_layout Section
29324 \begin_inset Index idx
29327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29334 \begin_inset Index idx
29337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29338 Document ! Branches
29344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29346 name "sec:Branches"
29353 \begin_layout Standard
29354 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29355 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29356 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29357 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29360 \begin_layout Standard
29361 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29362 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29363 To create a branch, either select the menu
29365 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29366 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29369 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29371 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29378 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29379 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29380 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29381 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29382 (see below for an example).
29383 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29384 to the name of the other) and to add
29385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29397 \begin_inset space ~
29400 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29401 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29404 \begin_layout Standard
29405 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29406 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29408 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29411 where you can choose a branch.
29412 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29416 \begin_layout Standard
29417 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29418 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29421 \begin_layout Standard
29422 \begin_inset Branch Question
29425 \begin_layout Standard
29426 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29434 \begin_layout Standard
29435 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29438 \begin_layout Standard
29439 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29447 \begin_layout Standard
29454 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29455 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29458 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29459 Consider for example a file
29460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29467 which has the above branches.
29469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29476 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29500 branch were inactive,
29501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29516 branch was active, likewise
29517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29532 branch was active, and
29533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29536 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29540 if both branches were active.
29541 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29544 \begin_layout Standard
29545 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29551 \begin_layout Standard
29552 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29553 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29555 For example you can define for the question branch
29559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29560 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29561 \begin_inset space ~
29565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29567 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29579 \begin_layout Standard
29589 \begin_layout Standard
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29600 and for the answer branch
29603 \begin_layout Standard
29613 \begin_layout Standard
29623 \begin_layout Standard
29624 \begin_inset Branch Question
29627 \begin_layout Standard
29631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29659 \begin_layout Standard
29660 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29663 \begin_layout Standard
29667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29695 \begin_layout Standard
29696 Now it is possible to use the
29700 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29707 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29710 commands to obtain conditional output.
29711 Here is an example formula where only the
29718 \begin_inset Formula
29720 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29728 \begin_layout Standard
29729 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29737 \begin_layout Standard
29738 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29744 \begin_inset space \space{}
29747 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29748 For this advanced usage, see the
29753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29756 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29763 \begin_layout Section
29765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29767 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29772 \begin_inset Index idx
29775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29784 \begin_layout Standard
29787 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29788 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29791 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29793 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29798 \begin_inset Index idx
29801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29802 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29807 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29808 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29809 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29810 part of the document.
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29815 The header information in the dialog tab
29819 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29820 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29821 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29822 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29826 \begin_inset space ~
29830 \begin_inset space ~
29835 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29836 title and author entries.
29840 \begin_inset space ~
29844 \begin_inset space ~
29848 \begin_inset space ~
29853 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29856 \begin_layout Standard
29857 You can specify in the dialog tab
29861 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29866 \begin_inset space ~
29870 \begin_inset space ~
29874 \begin_inset space ~
29879 option allows long links to be split;
29882 \begin_inset space ~
29886 \begin_inset space ~
29890 \begin_inset space ~
29898 \begin_inset space ~
29903 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29906 \begin_inset space ~
29911 colors the different links.
29912 The default colors are:
29915 \begin_layout Labeling
29916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29921 for hyperlinks and URLs
29924 \begin_layout Labeling
29925 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29933 \begin_layout Labeling
29934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29942 \begin_layout Standard
29943 but you can change these in the field
29948 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29951 \begin_layout Standard
29954 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29957 \begin_layout Standard
29962 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29963 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29964 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29967 \begin_layout Standard
29972 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29973 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29974 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29984 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29985 when opening the PDF.
29987 \begin_inset space ~
29990 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29991 \begin_inset space ~
29994 1 will only display the sections.
29997 \begin_layout Standard
29998 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29999 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30005 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30015 \begin_layout Section
30016 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30019 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30026 \begin_layout Subsection
30028 \begin_inset Index idx
30031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30040 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30047 \begin_layout Standard
30048 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30049 constructs, but not all.
30050 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30051 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30052 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30053 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30054 and their commands.
30057 \begin_layout Standard
30058 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30060 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30062 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30075 \begin_inset space ~
30080 or by the toolbar button
30093 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30101 \begin_layout Standard
30102 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30103 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30104 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30105 using the LaTeX-command
30111 , you can write the command part
30117 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30121 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30122 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30123 the following example:
30126 \begin_layout Standard
30127 \begin_inset Graphics
30128 filename clipart/ERT.png
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30140 \begin_layout Standard
30141 This is a line with a
30145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30168 \begin_layout Standard
30169 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30177 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30178 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30186 \begin_layout Subsection
30187 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30188 \begin_inset Argument 1
30191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30198 \begin_inset Index idx
30201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30210 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30217 \begin_layout Standard
30218 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30219 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30220 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30229 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30230 any time if you know the right commands.
30231 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30232 is the end of the day.
30233 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30234 all caption labels bold.
30235 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30237 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30241 \begin_layout Standard
30242 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30243 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30244 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30246 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30255 \begin_layout Standard
30256 As result you find that the package
30261 \begin_inset Index idx
30264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30265 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30271 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30273 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30276 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30291 \begin_inset space ~
30299 \begin_layout Standard
30304 usepackage[options]{package name}
30307 \begin_layout Standard
30308 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30309 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30310 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30313 \begin_layout Standard
30314 In your case the package name is
30319 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30324 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30325 So you add the command
30328 \begin_layout Standard
30333 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30336 \begin_layout Standard
30337 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30342 For more commands provided by the
30346 package, have a look at its documentation,
30347 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30361 \begin_layout Standard
30362 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30364 For example if you use a
30368 class, you don't need the package
30372 , you can instead write
30375 \begin_layout Standard
30380 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30385 \begin_layout Standard
30386 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30387 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30388 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30395 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30398 \begin_layout Standard
30399 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30400 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30402 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30403 the previous section.
30406 \begin_layout Standard
30407 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30409 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30411 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30418 \begin_layout Standard
30419 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30425 \begin_layout Standard
30429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30439 \begin_inset Note Note
30442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30443 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30451 \begin_layout Left Header
30452 \begin_inset Argument 1
30455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30475 \begin_inset Note Note
30478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30479 defines the header line as described below
30487 \begin_layout Center Header
30488 \begin_inset Argument 1
30491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30500 \begin_layout Right Header
30501 \begin_inset Argument 1
30504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30525 \begin_layout Left Footer
30526 \begin_inset Argument 1
30529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30550 \begin_layout Center Footer
30551 \begin_inset Argument 1
30554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30565 \begin_inset Newline newline
30569 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30575 \begin_layout Right Footer
30576 \begin_inset Argument 1
30579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30601 \begin_layout Section
30602 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30605 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30610 \begin_inset Index idx
30613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30614 Document ! Header/Footer line
30620 \begin_inset Index idx
30623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30632 \begin_layout Standard
30633 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30637 \begin_inset space ~
30648 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30654 \begin_inset space ~
30660 As a second step add in the menu
30662 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30663 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30670 Custom Header/Footerlines
30671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30675 This module offers the following 6
30676 \begin_inset space ~
30682 \begin_layout Description
30684 \begin_inset space ~
30688 \begin_inset space ~
30692 \begin_inset space ~
30696 \begin_inset space ~
30700 \begin_inset space ~
30706 \begin_layout Description
30708 \begin_inset space ~
30712 \begin_inset space ~
30716 \begin_inset space ~
30720 \begin_inset space ~
30724 \begin_inset space ~
30730 \begin_layout Standard
30731 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30734 \begin_layout Standard
30735 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30736 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30738 \begin_inset space ~
30742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30744 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30748 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30751 \begin_layout Standard
30752 \begin_inset Float figure
30758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30761 \begin_inset Tabular
30762 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30763 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30764 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30765 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30766 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30786 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30815 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30826 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30830 The normal text on the page goes here.
30831 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30833 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30834 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30839 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30848 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30859 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30877 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30906 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30924 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30929 name "fig:Page-layout"
30933 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30946 \begin_layout Standard
30947 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30955 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30959 \begin_inset space ~
30964 is set to “Default”.
30965 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30974 \begin_layout Subsection
30978 \begin_layout Standard
30979 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30980 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30981 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30982 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30984 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30985 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30988 \begin_layout Standard
30989 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30992 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31005 \begin_inset space ~
31013 \begin_layout Description
31016 thepage prints the current page number
31019 \begin_layout Description
31022 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31025 \begin_layout Description
31028 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31031 \begin_layout Description
31034 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31035 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31042 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31045 because it usually goes in a left header.
31048 \begin_layout Description
31051 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31052 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31054 It is normally used in the right header.
31057 \begin_layout Subsection
31058 Default header/footer
31061 \begin_layout Standard
31062 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31063 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31064 footer has the page number.
31065 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31066 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31067 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31070 \begin_inset space ~
31078 \begin_layout Subsection
31082 \begin_layout Standard
31083 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31084 Some pages are different.
31085 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31086 a new part or chapter in your book.
31087 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31088 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31089 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31093 Header and footer decoration line
31096 \begin_layout Standard
31097 By default, you get a 0.4
31098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31101 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31102 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31114 in the following way:
31117 \begin_layout Standard
31124 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31127 \begin_layout Standard
31128 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31137 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31144 \begin_layout Standard
31145 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31146 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31147 \begin_inset space ~
31151 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31161 Several header/footer lines
31164 \begin_layout Standard
31165 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31166 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31167 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31169 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31183 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31184 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31197 \begin_inset space ~
31205 \begin_layout Standard
31212 headheight}{height}
31215 \begin_layout Standard
31216 where height is a size in standard units.
31217 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31218 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31219 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31221 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31238 \begin_inset space ~
31243 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31248 \begin_inset Index idx
31251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31252 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31258 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31259 for your header/footer.
31262 \begin_layout Subsection
31266 \begin_layout Standard
31267 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31268 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31269 This example consists of the following definition:
31272 \begin_layout Description
31274 \begin_inset space ~
31283 , empty optional argument
31286 \begin_layout Description
31288 \begin_inset space ~
31291 Header empty, empty optional argument
31294 \begin_layout Description
31296 \begin_inset space ~
31305 in the optional argument
31308 \begin_layout Description
31310 \begin_inset space ~
31319 in the optional argument
31322 \begin_layout Description
31324 \begin_inset space ~
31336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31340 \begin_inset Newline newline
31344 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31351 in the optional argument
31354 \begin_layout Description
31356 \begin_inset space ~
31365 , empty optional argument
31368 \begin_layout Description
31371 headrulewidth set to 2
31372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31378 \begin_layout Standard
31379 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31380 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31386 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31395 \begin_layout Standard
31396 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31402 \begin_layout Standard
31406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31410 pagestyle{headings}
31416 \begin_inset Note Note
31419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31420 switches back to page style with the default headings
31428 \begin_layout Section
31429 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31432 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31437 \begin_inset Index idx
31440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31447 \begin_inset Index idx
31450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31459 \begin_layout Standard
31460 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31461 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31462 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31465 \begin_layout Subsection
31469 \begin_layout Standard
31470 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31475 \begin_inset Index idx
31478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31479 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31484 (on some systems named simply
31489 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31491 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31497 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31498 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31506 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31507 automatically installed together with LyX.
31510 \begin_layout Subsection
31514 \begin_layout Standard
31515 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31516 LaTeX, activate the option
31519 \begin_inset space ~
31526 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31532 \begin_inset space ~
31536 \begin_inset space ~
31539 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31546 \begin_inset space ~
31559 \begin_inset space ~
31564 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31567 \begin_layout Standard
31568 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31572 \begin_inset space ~
31580 \begin_inset space ~
31588 \begin_layout Standard
31589 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31593 \begin_layout Standard
31594 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31602 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31603 generated by activating the option
31606 \begin_inset space ~
31612 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31620 \begin_layout Subsection
31621 Selected document parts
31624 \begin_layout Standard
31625 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31626 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31627 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31628 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31630 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31634 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31635 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31636 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31639 \begin_layout Standard
31640 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31646 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31657 is explained in section
31659 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31664 \begin_inset space ~
31674 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31675 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31677 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31679 Here is the result:
31682 \begin_layout Standard
31683 \begin_inset Preview
31685 \begin_layout Standard
31690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31694 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31700 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31710 height_special "totalheight"
31713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31738 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31744 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31766 \begin_layout Standard
31767 Previewing works also for colors.
31768 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31786 is explained in section
31793 \begin_inset space ~
31806 \begin_layout Standard
31807 \begin_inset Preview
31809 \begin_layout Standard
31813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31832 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31837 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31856 \begin_layout Standard
31857 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31863 \begin_layout Standard
31864 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31865 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31866 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31868 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31869 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31870 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31871 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31875 \begin_layout Subsection
31879 \begin_layout Standard
31880 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31883 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31885 \begin_inset space ~
31890 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31891 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31893 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31894 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31895 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31896 the source view window.
31901 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31902 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31903 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31906 \begin_layout Section
31907 Advanced Find and Replace
31908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31910 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31915 \begin_inset Index idx
31918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31925 \begin_inset Index idx
31928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31937 \begin_layout Subsection
31941 \begin_layout Standard
31942 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31943 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31944 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31945 The key-features are:
31948 \begin_layout Itemize
31949 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31950 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31951 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31955 \begin_layout Itemize
31956 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31957 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31958 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31959 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31962 \begin_layout Itemize
31963 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31964 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31965 outside of mathematics environments
31968 \begin_layout Itemize
31969 Search may be widened to a specific
31974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31978 \begin_inset space ~
31981 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31982 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31989 \begin_layout Itemize
31990 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31991 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31996 \begin_inset space ~
31999 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32002 \begin_layout Subsection
32006 \begin_layout Standard
32007 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32009 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32022 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32025 ) or the toolbar button
32028 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32034 Advanced Find and Replace
32039 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32043 \begin_layout Standard
32048 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32052 \begin_inset space ~
32057 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32060 arg "break-paragraph"
32064 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32065 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32069 arg "break-paragraph"
32072 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32076 searches backwards.
32079 \begin_layout Standard
32083 \begin_inset space ~
32088 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32097 \begin_inset space ~
32102 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32106 Searching for mathematics
32109 \begin_layout Standard
32110 Mathematical formulas, such as
32111 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32114 or something more complex like
32115 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32118 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32123 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32124 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32125 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32126 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32136 \begin_layout Standard
32137 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32138 This is done by switching to the
32142 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32147 This way, entering in the
32154 \begin_layout Itemize
32155 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32156 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32159 \begin_layout Itemize
32160 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32161 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32164 \begin_layout Itemize
32165 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32166 of it only within section headings.
32167 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32168 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32172 \begin_layout Itemize
32173 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32174 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32181 \begin_layout Standard
32182 The entries made in the
32186 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32189 \begin_inset space ~
32195 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32199 button or alternatively press
32202 arg "break-paragraph"
32209 while the cursor is in the
32212 \begin_inset space ~
32220 \begin_layout Standard
32221 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32222 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32226 \begin_layout Itemize
32227 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32228 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32236 with its typewriter version
32237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32251 \begin_layout Itemize
32252 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32258 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32270 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32277 (you may want to enable the
32280 \begin_inset space ~
32288 \begin_inset space ~
32293 options and disable the
32301 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32309 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32310 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32314 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32317 , or occurrences of
32318 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32322 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32328 \begin_layout Subsection
32332 \begin_layout Standard
32333 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32338 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32342 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32351 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32357 This is done with the context menu
32359 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32360 Insert Regular Expression
32362 while the cursor is in the
32367 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32368 expression matching rules
32372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32373 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32379 \begin_inset space ~
32382 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32383 to match expressions.
32388 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32389 same text in the document.
32390 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32391 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32394 \begin_layout Enumerate
32395 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32400 editor the fraction
32401 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32405 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32408 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32409 fractions with the given denominator.
32412 \begin_layout Enumerate
32413 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32425 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32430 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32431 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32432 Also, by inserting a
32433 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32436 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32437 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32440 \begin_layout Standard
32441 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32442 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32443 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32446 , and referring back to them through
32447 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32451 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32455 For example, try searching with the regexp
32456 \begin_inset Newline newline
32459 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32462 \begin_inset Newline newline
32465 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32468 \begin_layout Standard
32469 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32472 \begin_layout Standard
32473 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32481 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32482 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32483 sub-expressions is absolute.
32485 \begin_inset space ~
32489 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32492 always refers to the first occurrence of
32493 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32496 in all entered regexps.
32504 \begin_layout Section
32506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32508 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32513 \begin_inset Index idx
32516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32525 \begin_layout Standard
32526 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32529 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32536 key or the toolbar button
32539 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32542 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32543 beginning of the currently selected text.
32544 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32545 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32546 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32547 scrolled so that it is visible.
32548 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32549 n, if any could be found.
32550 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32554 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32555 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32558 \begin_layout Standard
32559 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32562 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32566 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32567 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32568 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32569 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32572 \begin_inset space ~
32580 arg "dialog-show character"
32583 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32584 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32587 \begin_layout Standard
32588 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32589 \begin_inset Newline newline
32593 \begin_inset Flex URL
32596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32598 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32604 \begin_inset Newline newline
32608 \begin_inset space ~
32611 files for each language.
32612 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32613 \begin_inset space ~
32616 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32625 \begin_inset Newline newline
32628 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32629 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32630 but in most cases these are
32646 is the language code.
32649 \begin_layout Subsection
32653 \begin_layout Standard
32656 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32657 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32659 \begin_inset space ~
32662 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32665 you can set the following things:
32668 \begin_layout Description
32670 \begin_inset space ~
32673 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32674 Depending on your platform,
32688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32689 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32690 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32705 \begin_layout Description
32707 \begin_inset space ~
32710 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32711 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32714 \begin_layout Description
32716 \begin_inset space ~
32719 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32725 \begin_inset space \space{}
32729 This should normally not be needed.
32732 \begin_layout Description
32734 \begin_inset space ~
32738 \begin_inset space ~
32741 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32753 \begin_layout Description
32755 \begin_inset space ~
32758 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32759 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32760 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32761 appear in a context menu.
32762 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32766 \begin_layout Description
32768 \begin_inset space ~
32772 \begin_inset space ~
32776 \begin_inset space ~
32779 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32783 \begin_layout Section
32785 \begin_inset Index idx
32788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32797 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32804 \begin_layout Standard
32805 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32806 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32816 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32818 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32827 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32828 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32829 which are available for many languages.
32832 \begin_layout Standard
32833 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32837 \begin_layout Subsection
32838 Setting up the thesaurus
32841 \begin_layout Standard
32850 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32854 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32859 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32865 \begin_inset space ~
32873 For instance, the US English files are named:
32876 \begin_layout Itemize
32880 \begin_layout Itemize
32884 \begin_layout Standard
32893 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32894 and you just need to point LyX (in
32896 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32897 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32898 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32900 \begin_inset space ~
32905 ) to the path where they are installed.
32909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32910 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32911 ies, typical locations are
32917 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32921 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32925 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32928 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32934 LibreOffice-<Version>
32941 On the Mac, the default location is
32943 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32944 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32945 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32946 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32947 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32948 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32956 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32957 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32958 correct place right away.
32961 \begin_layout Standard
32962 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32963 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32967 \begin_layout Itemize
32968 \begin_inset Flex URL
32971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32973 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32981 \begin_layout Standard
32982 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32983 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32985 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32986 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32987 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32989 \begin_inset space ~
32995 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32996 and point LyX there.
32999 \begin_layout Standard
33000 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33002 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33005 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33011 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33014 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33022 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33023 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33024 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33026 \begin_inset space ~
33031 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33034 \begin_layout Subsection
33035 Using the thesaurus
33038 \begin_layout Standard
33039 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33041 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33044 or the toolbar button
33047 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33050 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33052 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33054 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33055 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33056 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33065 ), related terms (such as
33068 \begin_inset space ~
33077 ), compounds (such as
33080 \begin_inset space ~
33089 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33098 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33101 \begin_layout Standard
33102 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33103 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33107 \begin_layout Standard
33108 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33109 the dictionary, such as the above
33113 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33118 \begin_inset space \space{}
33121 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33122 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33123 For example, looking up the word form
33127 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33132 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33137 \begin_inset space \space{}
33148 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33149 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33150 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33153 \begin_layout Section
33155 \begin_inset Index idx
33158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33165 \begin_inset Index idx
33168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33169 Document ! Change Tracking
33175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33177 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33184 \begin_layout Standard
33185 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33186 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33187 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33188 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33190 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33192 \begin_inset space ~
33195 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33197 \begin_inset space ~
33205 \begin_layout Standard
33206 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33220 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33221 You can change the color in
33223 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33224 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33226 \begin_inset space ~
33230 \begin_inset space ~
33235 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33241 \begin_inset Index idx
33244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33245 Color ! Change tracking
33250 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33251 the cursor is in changed text.
33252 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33255 arg "changes-merge"
33261 \begin_layout Standard
33262 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33263 \begin_inset Index idx
33266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33275 \begin_layout Standard
33276 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33282 \begin_layout Standard
33283 \begin_inset Graphics
33284 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33292 \begin_layout Standard
33293 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33299 \begin_layout Standard
33300 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33303 \begin_layout Standard
33304 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33310 \begin_layout Standard
33311 \begin_inset Tabular
33312 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33313 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33314 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33315 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33325 arg "changes-track"
33333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33339 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33341 \begin_inset space ~
33344 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33346 \begin_inset space ~
33355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33364 arg "changes-output"
33372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33378 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33380 \begin_inset space ~
33383 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33385 \begin_inset space ~
33389 \begin_inset space ~
33393 \begin_inset space ~
33402 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33423 Jumps to the next change
33429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33438 arg "change-accept"
33446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33452 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33454 \begin_inset space ~
33457 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33459 \begin_inset space ~
33468 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33477 arg "change-reject"
33485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33491 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33493 \begin_inset space ~
33496 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33498 \begin_inset space ~
33507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33516 arg "changes-merge"
33524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33530 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33532 \begin_inset space ~
33535 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33537 \begin_inset space ~
33546 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33555 arg "all-changes-accept"
33563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33569 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33571 \begin_inset space ~
33574 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33576 \begin_inset space ~
33580 \begin_inset space ~
33589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33598 arg "all-changes-reject"
33606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33612 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33614 \begin_inset space ~
33617 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33623 \begin_inset space ~
33632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33655 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33656 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33669 \begin_inset space ~
33678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33701 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33703 \begin_inset space ~
33719 \begin_layout Standard
33720 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33726 \begin_layout Standard
33727 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33747 \begin_layout Standard
33748 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33749 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33750 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33751 the next change after the current cursor position.
33752 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33753 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33754 step to the next change.
33755 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33758 \begin_layout Standard
33759 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33760 to describe a change.
33763 \begin_layout Standard
33764 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33769 \begin_inset Index idx
33772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33773 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33779 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33780 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33786 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33789 \begin_layout Section
33790 Comparison of Documents
33791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33793 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33798 \begin_inset Index idx
33801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33802 Comparison of documents
33810 \begin_layout Standard
33811 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33813 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33817 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33819 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33820 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33824 \begin_inset space ~
33828 \begin_inset space ~
33832 \begin_inset space ~
33841 \begin_inset space ~
33845 \begin_inset space ~
33849 \begin_inset space ~
33853 \begin_inset space ~
33857 \begin_inset space ~
33861 \begin_inset space ~
33866 enables the change tracking option
33869 \begin_inset space ~
33873 \begin_inset space ~
33877 \begin_inset space ~
33882 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33885 \begin_layout Section
33886 International Support
33887 \begin_inset Index idx
33890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33891 International support
33899 \begin_layout Standard
33900 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33901 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33902 up LyX to use them:
33903 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33905 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33912 \begin_layout Standard
33913 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33914 \begin_inset space ~
33918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33920 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33927 \begin_layout Subsection
33929 \begin_inset Index idx
33932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33939 \begin_inset Index idx
33942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33943 Document ! Settings
33949 \begin_inset Index idx
33952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33953 Document ! Language
33961 \begin_layout Standard
33964 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33965 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33968 dialog lets you set
33970 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33975 \begin_layout Standard
33980 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33984 \begin_inset space ~
33989 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33990 For details about the different encoding options see section
33991 \begin_inset space ~
33995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33997 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34004 \begin_layout Subsection
34005 Keyboard mapping configuration
34006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34008 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34016 If you have for example a U.
34017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34020 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34021 can use an alternate keymap.
34022 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34023 use an Italian keymap.
34026 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34027 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34028 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34031 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34032 \begin_inset space ~
34036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34038 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34043 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34044 which one you want to use.
34047 \begin_layout Standard
34048 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34049 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34050 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34054 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34055 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34056 one to support the characters you want.
34057 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34064 \begin_layout Chapter
34067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34069 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34076 \begin_layout Standard
34077 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34078 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34079 topic inside the user's guide.
34082 \begin_layout Section
34084 \begin_inset Index idx
34087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34096 \begin_layout Standard
34101 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34104 \begin_layout Subsection
34108 \begin_layout Standard
34109 Creates a new document.
34112 \begin_layout Subsection
34116 \begin_layout Standard
34117 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34118 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34119 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34122 \begin_layout Subsection
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34130 \begin_layout Subsection
34134 \begin_layout Standard
34135 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34136 Click there on a file to open it.
34139 \begin_layout Subsection
34143 \begin_layout Standard
34144 Closes the current document.
34147 \begin_layout Subsection
34151 \begin_layout Standard
34152 Closes all opened documents.
34155 \begin_layout Subsection
34159 \begin_layout Standard
34160 Saves the actual document.
34163 \begin_layout Subsection
34167 \begin_layout Standard
34168 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34171 \begin_layout Subsection
34175 \begin_layout Standard
34176 Saves all opened documents.
34179 \begin_layout Subsection
34183 \begin_layout Standard
34184 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34187 \begin_layout Subsection
34191 \begin_layout Standard
34192 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34193 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34194 It is described in the section
34196 Version Control in LyX
34200 Additional Features
34205 \begin_layout Subsection
34209 \begin_layout Standard
34210 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34211 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34213 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34216 \begin_layout Standard
34217 When using the menu entry
34220 \begin_inset space ~
34225 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34229 \begin_inset space ~
34233 \begin_inset space ~
34237 \begin_inset space ~
34242 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34243 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34246 \begin_layout Subsection
34248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34257 \begin_layout Standard
34258 You can export your document to various file formats.
34259 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34260 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34261 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34264 \begin_layout Standard
34265 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34267 \begin_inset space ~
34271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34273 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34280 \begin_layout Description
34286 \begin_inset space ~
34293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34300 yX format of the special LyX
34301 \begin_inset space ~
34304 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34305 \begin_inset Newline newline
34308 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34311 \begin_layout Description
34312 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34318 \begin_layout Description
34320 \begin_inset space ~
34323 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34329 \begin_layout Description
34330 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34331 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34332 files paths or file names in your document.
34333 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34340 \begin_layout Description
34341 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34342 in files paths or file names
34345 \begin_layout Description
34347 \begin_inset space ~
34354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34361 eX) DVI-format using the program
34365 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34368 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34376 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34384 \begin_layout Description
34386 \begin_inset space ~
34389 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34393 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34398 \begin_layout Description
34399 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34403 \begin_layout Description
34405 \begin_inset space ~
34409 \begin_inset space ~
34412 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34416 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34424 \begin_layout Description
34431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34439 \begin_inset space ~
34450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34463 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34468 \begin_layout Description
34475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34483 \begin_inset space ~
34488 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34489 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34493 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34496 \begin_layout Description
34503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34511 \begin_inset space ~
34516 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34517 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34525 \begin_layout Description
34532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34540 \begin_inset space ~
34551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34564 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34569 \begin_layout Description
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34575 \begin_inset space ~
34584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34593 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34594 music notation software
34599 \begin_layout Description
34606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34616 \begin_inset space ~
34620 \begin_inset space ~
34623 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34624 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34625 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34628 \begin_layout Description
34635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34645 \begin_inset space ~
34648 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34664 represent the version number)
34667 \begin_layout Description
34674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34683 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34686 \begin_layout Description
34687 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34692 \begin_layout Description
34693 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34695 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34698 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34702 \begin_layout Description
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34711 PDF-format using the program
34715 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34718 \begin_layout Description
34722 \begin_inset space ~
34729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34738 PDF-format using the program
34742 , produces PDF-files directly
34745 \begin_layout Description
34749 \begin_inset space ~
34754 PDF-format using the program
34758 , produces PDF-files directly
34761 \begin_layout Description
34765 \begin_inset space ~
34770 PDF-format using the program
34774 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34777 \begin_layout Description
34781 \begin_inset space ~
34788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34797 PDF-format using the program
34801 , produces PDF-files directly
34804 \begin_layout Description
34808 \begin_inset space ~
34816 \begin_layout Description
34820 \begin_inset space ~
34824 \begin_inset space ~
34829 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34830 and then exported as text using the program
34835 \begin_layout Description
34840 PostScript format using the program
34845 \begin_layout Description
34846 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34847 programming language
34860 it is possible to use
34867 \begin_layout Standard
34868 If one of the menu entries
34875 \begin_inset space ~
34884 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34885 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34886 \begin_inset space ~
34890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34892 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34897 \begin_inset Index idx
34900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34901 Reconfiguration of LyX
34909 \begin_layout Subsection
34913 \begin_layout Standard
34914 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34915 format or send it to a printer.
34916 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34917 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34923 For more information have a look at section
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34930 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34937 \begin_layout Subsection
34941 \begin_layout Standard
34942 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34943 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34944 prefix, see section
34945 \begin_inset space ~
34949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34951 reference "sec:Paths"
34956 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34965 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34966 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34967 \begin_inset space ~
34971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34973 reference "sub:Converters"
34980 \begin_layout Subsection
34981 New and Close Window
34984 \begin_layout Standard
34985 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34988 \begin_layout Subsection
34992 \begin_layout Standard
34993 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34996 \begin_layout Section
34998 \begin_inset Index idx
35001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35010 \begin_layout Subsection
35014 \begin_layout Standard
35015 Described in section
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35022 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35029 \begin_layout Subsection
35030 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35033 \begin_layout Standard
35034 Described in section
35035 \begin_inset space ~
35039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35041 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35048 \begin_layout Subsection
35052 \begin_layout Standard
35053 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35054 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35057 \begin_layout Subsection
35061 \begin_layout Standard
35062 Selects the whole document.
35065 \begin_layout Subsection
35066 Find & Replace (Quick)
35069 \begin_layout Standard
35070 Described in section
35071 \begin_inset space ~
35075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35077 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35084 \begin_layout Subsection
35085 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35088 \begin_layout Standard
35089 Described in section
35090 \begin_inset space ~
35094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35096 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35103 \begin_layout Subsection
35104 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35107 \begin_layout Standard
35108 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35112 \begin_layout Subsection
35116 \begin_layout Standard
35117 Described in section
35118 \begin_inset space ~
35122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35124 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35131 \begin_layout Subsection
35133 \begin_inset Index idx
35136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35137 Paragraph ! Settings
35145 \begin_layout Standard
35146 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35147 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35151 \begin_layout Standard
35152 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35153 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35159 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35160 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35162 \begin_inset space ~
35170 \begin_layout Subsection
35174 \begin_layout Standard
35175 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35176 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35177 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35181 \begin_layout Standard
35182 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35184 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35185 The properties of tables are described in section
35186 \begin_inset space ~
35190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35192 reference "sec:Tables"
35196 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35197 \begin_inset space ~
35201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35203 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35210 \begin_layout Subsection
35211 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35214 \begin_layout Standard
35215 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
35217 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35218 \begin_inset space ~
35222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35224 reference "sec:Nesting"
35229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35231 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35238 \begin_layout Section
35240 \begin_inset Index idx
35243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35252 \begin_layout Standard
35253 At the bottom of the
35257 menu the opened documents are listed.
35260 \begin_layout Subsection
35261 Open/Close all Insets
35264 \begin_layout Standard
35265 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35268 \begin_layout Subsection
35269 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35272 \begin_layout Standard
35273 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35276 \begin_layout Standard
35277 Math macros are described in the
35284 \begin_layout Subsection
35288 \begin_layout Standard
35289 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35290 \begin_inset space ~
35294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35296 reference "sec:Navigating"
35301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35303 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35310 \begin_layout Subsection
35314 \begin_layout Standard
35315 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35317 \begin_inset space ~
35321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35323 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35330 \begin_layout Subsection
35334 \begin_layout Standard
35335 Opens a window showing console messages.
35336 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35340 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35341 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35344 \begin_layout Subsection
35346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35348 name "sub:Toolbars"
35353 \begin_inset Index idx
35356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35365 \begin_layout Standard
35366 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35367 All toolbars and the
35370 \begin_inset space ~
35375 can be turned on and off.
35380 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35392 \begin_inset space ~
35404 \begin_inset space ~
35409 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35413 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35420 \begin_layout Standard
35425 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35429 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35430 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35431 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35432 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35433 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35436 \begin_layout Standard
35437 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35438 \begin_inset space ~
35442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35444 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35451 \begin_layout Subsection
35455 \begin_layout Standard
35459 \begin_inset space ~
35463 \begin_inset space ~
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35471 \begin_inset space ~
35475 \begin_inset space ~
35479 \begin_inset space ~
35484 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35491 \begin_inset space ~
35495 \begin_inset space ~
35499 \begin_inset space ~
35503 \begin_inset space ~
35507 \begin_inset space ~
35512 will split it horizontally.
35513 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35514 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35515 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35516 three or more documents at the same time.
35517 To close a split view, use the menu
35520 \begin_inset space ~
35524 \begin_inset space ~
35532 \begin_layout Subsection
35536 \begin_layout Standard
35537 Closes a split view.
35540 \begin_layout Subsection
35544 \begin_layout Standard
35545 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35546 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35547 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35548 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35549 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35552 \begin_layout Section
35554 \begin_inset Index idx
35557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35566 \begin_layout Subsection
35570 \begin_layout Standard
35571 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35572 \begin_inset space ~
35576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35578 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35589 \begin_layout Subsection
35591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35593 name "sub:Special-Character"
35600 \begin_layout Standard
35601 Here you can insert the following characters:
35604 \begin_layout Description
35609 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35611 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35612 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35613 You can get a complete display by checking
35616 \begin_inset space ~
35622 \begin_inset Newline newline
35626 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35634 Not all characters will be visible in the
35638 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35646 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35650 ) can display every character.
35658 \begin_layout Description
35659 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35663 \begin_layout Description
35665 \begin_inset space ~
35669 \begin_inset space ~
35672 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35673 \begin_inset space ~
35677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35679 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35686 \begin_layout Description
35688 \begin_inset space ~
35691 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35694 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35695 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35701 \begin_layout Description
35703 \begin_inset space ~
35706 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35716 \begin_layout Description
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35721 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35725 \begin_layout Description
35727 \begin_inset space ~
35730 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35734 \begin_layout Description
35736 \begin_inset space ~
35739 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35745 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35751 \begin_layout Description
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35756 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35760 \begin_layout Description
35762 \begin_inset space ~
35766 \begin_inset Index idx
35769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35776 \begin_inset Index idx
35779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35780 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35785 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35786 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35788 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35793 \begin_inset Index idx
35796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35797 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35803 \begin_inset Newline newline
35806 More information about this feature can be found in the
35812 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35818 \begin_layout Subsection
35822 \begin_layout Standard
35823 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35826 \begin_layout Description
35827 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35828 \begin_inset script superscript
35830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35839 \begin_layout Description
35840 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35841 \begin_inset script subscript
35843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35852 \begin_layout Description
35854 \begin_inset space ~
35857 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35858 \begin_inset space ~
35862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35864 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35871 \begin_layout Description
35873 \begin_inset space ~
35876 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35877 \begin_inset space ~
35881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35883 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35890 \begin_layout Description
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35895 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35896 \begin_inset space ~
35900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35902 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35909 \begin_layout Description
35911 \begin_inset space ~
35914 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35920 \begin_inset space \space{}
35923 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35924 An example from the LyX
35929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35932 To insert a fraction use the command
35937 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35941 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35950 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35957 \begin_layout Description
35959 \begin_inset space ~
35962 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35963 \begin_inset space ~
35967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35969 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35976 \begin_layout Description
35978 \begin_inset space ~
35981 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35988 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35995 \begin_layout Description
35997 \begin_inset space ~
36000 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36001 \begin_inset space ~
36005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36007 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36014 \begin_layout Description
36015 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36016 \begin_inset space ~
36020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36022 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36029 \begin_layout Description
36031 \begin_inset space ~
36034 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36035 \begin_inset space ~
36039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36041 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36048 \begin_layout Description
36050 \begin_inset space ~
36053 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36054 \begin_inset space ~
36058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36060 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36067 \begin_layout Description
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36076 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36077 \begin_inset space ~
36081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36083 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36090 \begin_layout Description
36092 \begin_inset space ~
36095 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36096 as described in section
36097 \begin_inset space ~
36101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36103 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36110 \begin_layout Description
36112 \begin_inset space ~
36115 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36116 \begin_inset space ~
36120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36122 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36129 \begin_layout Description
36131 \begin_inset space ~
36134 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36135 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36137 \begin_inset space ~
36141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36143 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36150 \begin_layout Description
36152 \begin_inset space ~
36155 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36156 \begin_inset space ~
36160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36162 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36169 \begin_layout Description
36171 \begin_inset space ~
36175 \begin_inset space ~
36178 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36185 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36192 \begin_layout Subsection
36196 \begin_layout Standard
36197 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36201 \begin_inset space ~
36222 are described in section
36223 \begin_inset space ~
36227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36229 reference "sec:toc"
36238 is described in section
36239 \begin_inset space ~
36243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36245 reference "sec:Index"
36253 is described in section
36254 \begin_inset space ~
36258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36260 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36266 BibTeX Bibliography
36268 is described in section
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36275 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36282 \begin_layout Subsection
36286 \begin_layout Standard
36287 To insert floats, as described in section
36288 \begin_inset space ~
36292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36294 reference "sec:Floats"
36298 and in detail the chapter
36305 \begin_inset space ~
36313 \begin_layout Subsection
36317 \begin_layout Standard
36318 To insert notes, described in section
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36325 reference "sec:Notes"
36332 \begin_layout Subsection
36336 \begin_layout Standard
36337 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36339 Branches are described in section
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36346 reference "sec:Branches"
36353 \begin_layout Subsection
36357 \begin_layout Standard
36358 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36359 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36361 An example is the document class
36362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36369 with three custom insets.
36372 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36376 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36382 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36385 \begin_layout Subsection
36387 \begin_inset Index idx
36390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36399 \begin_layout Standard
36400 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36402 For more information see chapter
36404 External Document Parts
36407 \begin_inset space ~
36413 \begin_layout Subsection
36415 \begin_inset Index idx
36418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36427 \begin_layout Standard
36428 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36429 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36436 \begin_inset space ~
36444 \begin_layout Subsection
36448 \begin_layout Standard
36453 dialog as described in section
36454 \begin_inset space ~
36458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36460 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36467 \begin_layout Subsection
36471 \begin_layout Standard
36476 as described in section
36477 \begin_inset space ~
36481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36483 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36490 \begin_layout Subsection
36494 \begin_layout Standard
36499 as described in section
36500 \begin_inset space ~
36504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36506 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36513 \begin_layout Subsection
36515 \begin_inset Index idx
36518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36525 \begin_inset Index idx
36528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36529 Longtables ! Caption
36537 \begin_layout Standard
36538 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36539 Floats are described in section
36540 \begin_inset space ~
36544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36546 reference "sec:Floats"
36550 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36557 \begin_inset space ~
36565 \begin_layout Subsection
36569 \begin_layout Standard
36570 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36571 \begin_inset space ~
36575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36577 reference "sec:Index"
36584 \begin_layout Subsection
36588 \begin_layout Standard
36589 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36590 \begin_inset space ~
36594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36596 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36603 \begin_layout Subsection
36607 \begin_layout Standard
36608 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36609 Tables are described in section
36610 \begin_inset space ~
36614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36616 reference "sec:Tables"
36620 and in detail in the chapter
36627 \begin_inset space ~
36635 \begin_layout Subsection
36639 \begin_layout Standard
36645 Graphics are described in section
36646 \begin_inset space ~
36650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36652 reference "sec:Graphics"
36659 \begin_layout Subsection
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36664 Inserts a URL as described in section
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36671 reference "sub:URLs"
36678 \begin_layout Subsection
36682 \begin_layout Standard
36683 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36684 \begin_inset space ~
36688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36690 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36697 \begin_layout Subsection
36701 \begin_layout Standard
36702 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36703 \begin_inset space ~
36707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36709 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36716 \begin_layout Subsection
36720 \begin_layout Standard
36721 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36722 \begin_inset space ~
36726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36728 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36735 \begin_layout Subsection
36739 \begin_layout Standard
36740 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36741 title or caption of a float.
36742 Inserts a short title as described in section
36743 \begin_inset space ~
36747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36749 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36756 \begin_layout Subsection
36760 \begin_layout Standard
36761 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36762 \begin_inset space ~
36766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36768 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36775 \begin_layout Subsection
36777 \begin_inset Index idx
36780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36789 \begin_layout Standard
36790 Inserts a program listings box.
36791 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36793 Program Code Listings
36798 \begin_inset space ~
36806 \begin_layout Subsection
36810 \begin_layout Standard
36811 Inserts the actual date.
36812 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36814 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36822 \begin_inset space ~
36830 \begin_layout Subsection
36834 \begin_layout Standard
36835 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36836 \begin_inset space ~
36840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36842 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36849 \begin_layout Section
36851 \begin_inset Index idx
36854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36863 \begin_layout Standard
36864 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36865 \begin_inset space ~
36868 of the current document.
36869 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36872 \begin_layout Subsection
36876 \begin_layout Standard
36877 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36878 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36879 to jump, for example, between section
36880 \begin_inset space ~
36884 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36885 \begin_inset space ~
36888 2.5 and use the submenu
36891 \begin_inset space ~
36895 \begin_inset space ~
36902 \begin_inset space ~
36908 \begin_inset space ~
36912 \begin_inset space ~
36918 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36922 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36928 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36931 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36934 \begin_layout Standard
36935 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36939 \begin_inset space ~
36944 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36947 \begin_inset space ~
36952 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36955 \begin_layout Subsection
36956 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36959 \begin_layout Standard
36960 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36964 \begin_layout Subsection
36968 \begin_layout Standard
36969 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36970 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36971 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36975 \begin_inset space ~
36979 \begin_inset space ~
36987 \begin_layout Subsection
36991 \begin_layout Standard
36992 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36995 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36997 \begin_inset space ~
37005 \begin_inset space ~
37010 manual for a detailed description.
37013 \begin_layout Section
37015 \begin_inset Index idx
37018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37027 \begin_layout Subsection
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 Change Tracking is described in section
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37039 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37046 \begin_layout Subsection
37051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37061 \begin_layout Standard
37062 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37064 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37065 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37066 to the clipboard or update the view.
37067 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37070 \begin_layout Subsection
37071 Start Appendix Here
37074 \begin_layout Standard
37075 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37076 as described in section
37077 \begin_inset space ~
37081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37083 reference "sec:Appendices"
37090 \begin_layout Subsection
37092 \begin_inset space ~
37098 \begin_layout Standard
37099 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37100 default output format for the document (menu
37102 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37103 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37104 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37106 \begin_inset space ~
37110 \begin_inset space ~
37116 \begin_inset space ~
37120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37122 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37126 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37128 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37129 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37134 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37136 \begin_inset space ~
37139 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37141 \begin_inset space ~
37145 \begin_inset space ~
37151 \begin_inset space ~
37155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37157 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37161 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37162 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37164 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37165 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37167 \begin_inset space ~
37170 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37172 \begin_inset space ~
37175 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37179 \begin_inset space ~
37183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37185 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37190 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37191 The default output format is
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37202 \begin_layout Subsection
37203 View (Other Formats)
37206 \begin_layout Standard
37207 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37208 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37209 actual document with an external program.
37210 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37211 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37212 All possible formats are listed in section
37213 \begin_inset space ~
37217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37219 reference "sub:Export"
37224 You should at least see the menu entry
37229 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37230 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37231 \begin_inset space ~
37235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37237 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37242 \begin_inset Index idx
37245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37246 Reconfiguration of LyX
37254 \begin_layout Standard
37255 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37256 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37258 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37259 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37261 \begin_inset space ~
37264 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37269 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37273 \begin_inset space ~
37277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37279 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37284 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37287 \begin_layout Subsection
37289 \begin_inset space ~
37295 \begin_layout Standard
37296 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37297 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37300 \begin_layout Subsection
37301 Update (Other Formats)
37304 \begin_layout Standard
37305 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37306 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37309 \begin_layout Subsection
37310 View Master Document
37313 \begin_layout Standard
37314 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37335 manual for more information on this topic).
37336 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37337 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37341 \begin_inset space ~
37345 \begin_inset space ~
37350 generates the output of the whole book, while
37354 will just output the chapter alone.
37357 \begin_layout Standard
37358 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37359 in the document settings (menu
37361 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37362 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37363 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37365 \begin_inset space ~
37369 \begin_inset space ~
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37381 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37385 ) or in the preferences (menu
37387 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37388 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37390 \begin_inset space ~
37393 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37395 \begin_inset space ~
37398 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37400 \begin_inset space ~
37404 \begin_inset space ~
37410 \begin_inset space ~
37414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37416 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37423 \begin_layout Subsection
37424 Update Master Document
37427 \begin_layout Standard
37428 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37444 \begin_inset space ~
37449 manual for more information on this topic).
37450 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37451 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37454 \begin_layout Standard
37455 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37456 in the document settings (menu
37458 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37459 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37460 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37462 \begin_inset space ~
37466 \begin_inset space ~
37472 \begin_inset space ~
37476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37478 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37482 ) or in the preferences (menu
37484 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37485 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37487 \begin_inset space ~
37490 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37492 \begin_inset space ~
37495 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37497 \begin_inset space ~
37501 \begin_inset space ~
37507 \begin_inset space ~
37511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37513 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37520 \begin_layout Subsection
37524 \begin_layout Standard
37525 Un/compresses the current document.
37528 \begin_layout Subsection
37532 \begin_layout Standard
37533 The document settings are described in appendix
37534 \begin_inset space ~
37538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37540 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37547 \begin_layout Section
37549 \begin_inset Index idx
37552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37561 \begin_layout Subsection
37565 \begin_layout Standard
37566 Spell checking is explained in section
37567 \begin_inset space ~
37571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37573 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37580 \begin_layout Subsection
37584 \begin_layout Standard
37585 The thesaurus is described in section
37586 \begin_inset space ~
37590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37592 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37599 \begin_layout Subsection
37601 \begin_inset Index idx
37604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37611 \begin_inset Index idx
37614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37623 \begin_layout Standard
37624 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37625 the highlighted document part.
37628 \begin_layout Subsection
37633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37641 \begin_inset Index idx
37644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37653 \begin_layout Standard
37654 Generates with the help of the program
37658 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37659 This feature is not available on Windows.
37662 \begin_layout Subsection
37667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37675 \begin_inset Index idx
37678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37687 \begin_layout Standard
37688 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37693 \begin_inset space ~
37698 to see the full filename paths.
37701 \begin_layout Subsection
37703 \begin_inset Index idx
37706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37716 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37723 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37730 \begin_layout Subsection
37732 \begin_inset Index idx
37735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37736 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37747 Reconfiguration of LyX
37751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37764 \begin_inset Index idx
37767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37768 Reconfiguration of LyX
37776 \begin_layout Standard
37777 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37778 needs; see also section
37779 \begin_inset space ~
37783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37785 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37792 \begin_layout Subsection
37796 \begin_layout Standard
37801 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37802 \begin_inset space ~
37806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37808 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37815 \begin_layout Section
37817 \begin_inset Index idx
37820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37829 \begin_layout Standard
37830 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37832 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37836 \begin_layout Standard
37840 \begin_inset space ~
37845 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37846 found by LyX (see also section
37847 \begin_inset space ~
37851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37853 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37860 \begin_layout Standard
37864 \begin_inset space ~
37871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37880 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37884 \begin_layout Section
37886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37888 name "sec:Toolbars"
37895 \begin_layout Standard
37896 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37897 \begin_inset space ~
37901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37903 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37910 \begin_layout Standard
37911 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37912 This is described in the
37914 Additional Features
37919 \begin_layout Subsection
37921 \begin_inset Index idx
37924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37933 \begin_layout Standard
37934 \begin_inset Graphics
37935 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37943 \begin_layout Standard
37944 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37950 \begin_layout Standard
37951 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37968 \begin_inset Note Note
37971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37972 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37977 manual for more information.
37985 \begin_layout Standard
37986 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37992 \begin_layout Standard
37993 \begin_inset Tabular
37994 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37995 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37996 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37997 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38003 \begin_inset Graphics
38004 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38018 pull-down box for the environments
38031 \begin_layout Standard
38032 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38038 \begin_layout Standard
38040 \begin_inset Tabular
38041 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38042 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38043 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38044 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38068 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38075 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38098 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38128 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38144 arg "dialog-show print"
38152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38158 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38174 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38188 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38218 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38225 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38248 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38255 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38278 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38308 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38315 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38338 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38345 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38354 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38368 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38394 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38408 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38427 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38436 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38450 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38451 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38479 Emphasize text, function of the
38481 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38483 \begin_inset space ~
38486 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38495 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38516 Set text to noun style, function of the
38518 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38523 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38541 arg "textstyle-apply"
38549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38553 Format text using the current settings in the
38555 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38557 \begin_inset space ~
38560 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38592 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38593 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38595 \begin_inset space ~
38604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38613 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38627 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38641 arg "tabular-insert"
38649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38655 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38671 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38683 Toggle outline window on/off,
38685 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38692 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38701 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38713 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38719 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38728 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38740 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38753 \begin_layout Subsection
38755 \begin_inset Index idx
38758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38767 \begin_layout Standard
38768 \begin_inset Graphics
38769 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38777 \begin_layout Standard
38778 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38784 \begin_layout Standard
38785 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38789 \begin_layout Standard
38790 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38796 \begin_layout Standard
38797 \begin_inset Tabular
38798 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38799 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38800 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38801 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38802 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38829 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38838 arg "layout Enumerate"
38846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38865 arg "layout Itemize"
38873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38883 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38910 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38919 arg "layout Description"
38927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38946 arg "depth-increment"
38954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38960 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38962 \begin_inset space ~
38966 \begin_inset space ~
38975 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38984 arg "depth-decrement"
38992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38998 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39004 \begin_inset space ~
39013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39022 arg "float-insert figure"
39030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39036 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39037 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39053 arg "float-insert table"
39061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39067 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39068 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39075 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39098 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39114 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39128 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39144 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39158 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39188 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39190 \begin_inset space ~
39199 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39208 arg "nomencl-insert"
39216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39222 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39224 \begin_inset space ~
39233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39242 arg "footnote-insert"
39250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39256 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39263 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39272 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39286 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39288 \begin_inset space ~
39297 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39320 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39321 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39334 \begin_inset space ~
39343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39352 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39366 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39373 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39396 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39426 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39443 \begin_inset space ~
39452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39461 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39475 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39476 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39483 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39492 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39506 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39507 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39509 \begin_inset space ~
39518 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39527 arg "dialog-show character"
39535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39541 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39543 \begin_inset space ~
39546 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39562 arg "layout-paragraph"
39570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39576 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39578 \begin_inset space ~
39587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39596 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39610 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39624 \begin_layout Subsection
39625 View/Update Toolbar
39626 \begin_inset Index idx
39629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39630 Toolbar ! View / Update
39638 \begin_layout Standard
39639 \begin_inset Graphics
39640 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39647 \begin_layout Standard
39648 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39654 \begin_layout Standard
39655 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39659 \begin_layout Standard
39660 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39666 \begin_layout Standard
39667 \begin_inset Tabular
39668 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39669 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39670 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39671 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39672 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39695 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39711 arg "buffer-update"
39719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39725 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39732 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39741 arg "master-buffer-view"
39749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39755 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39757 \begin_inset space ~
39766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39775 arg "master-buffer-update"
39783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39789 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39791 \begin_inset space ~
39795 \begin_inset space ~
39804 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39813 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39827 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39828 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39829 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39830 Synchronize with Output
39836 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39841 \begin_inset Graphics
39842 filename ../images/view-others.png
39844 groupId toolbarbuttons
39855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39861 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39862 View (Other Formats)
39868 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39873 \begin_inset Graphics
39874 filename ../images/update-others.png
39876 groupId toolbarbuttons
39885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39891 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39892 Update (Other Formats)
39905 \begin_layout Standard
39906 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39910 \begin_layout Subsection
39914 \begin_layout Standard
39915 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39916 \begin_inset space ~
39920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39922 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39926 , the table toolbar
39927 \begin_inset Index idx
39930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39939 \begin_inset space ~
39944 manual and the math macro toolbar
39945 \begin_inset Index idx
39948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39961 \begin_layout Chapter
39962 The Document Settings
39963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39965 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39970 \begin_inset Index idx
39973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39974 Document ! Settings
39982 \begin_layout Standard
39986 \begin_inset space ~
39991 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39992 is called with the menu
39994 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39998 You can save your document settings as default with the
40000 Save as Document Defaults
40002 button in any dialog.
40003 This will create a template named
40007 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40011 \begin_layout Standard
40016 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40017 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40020 \begin_layout Standard
40021 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40022 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40023 to find the one you are looking for.
40024 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40025 the submenus of the dialog.
40027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40031 \begin_inset space \space{}
40035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40042 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40043 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40044 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40047 \begin_layout Section
40051 \begin_layout Standard
40052 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40054 Document classes are described in section
40055 \begin_inset space ~
40059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40061 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40069 \begin_layout Standard
40073 \begin_inset space ~
40078 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40082 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40083 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40085 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40094 \begin_layout Standard
40095 Some classes use special class options by default.
40096 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40100 and you can decide to use them or not.
40101 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40102 recommended you leave them untouched.
40107 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40112 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40113 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40119 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40120 \begin_inset Newline newline
40125 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40128 \begin_inset Newline newline
40131 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40137 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40139 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40151 \begin_layout Standard
40156 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40157 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40158 document is opened without its master.
40159 This way child documents are always compilable.
40160 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40167 \begin_inset space ~
40175 \begin_layout Standard
40176 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40186 \begin_inset Index idx
40189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40190 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40196 \begin_inset Index idx
40199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40200 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40205 for cross-references, see section
40206 \begin_inset space ~
40210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40212 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40219 \begin_layout Section
40223 \begin_layout Standard
40224 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40225 Please refer to the section
40228 \begin_inset space ~
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40241 manual for details.
40244 \begin_layout Section
40248 \begin_layout Standard
40249 Modules are explained in section
40250 \begin_inset space ~
40254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40256 reference "sub:Modules"
40263 \begin_layout Section
40267 \begin_layout Standard
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40275 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40282 \begin_layout Section
40286 \begin_layout Standard
40287 The document font settings are described in section
40288 \begin_inset space ~
40292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40294 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40301 \begin_layout Section
40305 \begin_layout Standard
40306 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40323 and whether it should be a
40326 \begin_inset space ~
40331 can also be specified here.
40334 \begin_layout Standard
40335 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40337 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40339 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40342 \begin_layout Section
40346 \begin_layout Standard
40347 This dialog is described in sections
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40354 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40361 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40368 \begin_layout Section
40372 \begin_layout Standard
40373 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40380 reference "sub:Margins"
40387 \begin_layout Section
40389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40391 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40396 \begin_inset Index idx
40399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40400 Language ! Encoding
40408 \begin_layout Standard
40409 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40410 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40411 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40412 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40413 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40414 known for a particular character).
40418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40419 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40424 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40429 manual for details.
40437 \begin_layout Standard
40438 If you use the option
40442 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40443 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40444 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40445 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40446 exactly one encoding.
40447 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40450 \begin_layout Standard
40451 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40452 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40453 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40454 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40455 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40456 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40461 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40462 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40463 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40464 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40465 engines to standard LaTeX.
40466 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40467 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40470 \begin_inset space ~
40477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40489 \begin_inset space ~
40496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40514 \begin_inset space ~
40518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40520 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40525 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40529 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40532 \begin_layout Standard
40536 \begin_inset space ~
40541 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40551 The possible settings are:
40554 \begin_layout Description
40555 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40557 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40558 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40562 \begin_inset space ~
40566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40568 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40575 \begin_layout Description
40576 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40577 format you will use.
40578 In many cases this will be
40583 \begin_inset Index idx
40586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40587 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40593 If the newer package
40598 \begin_inset Index idx
40601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40602 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40607 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40608 this package will be used instead of
40615 \begin_layout Description
40617 \begin_inset space ~
40628 would be more appropriate.
40631 \begin_layout Description
40632 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40633 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40637 (for German texts), type in
40640 \begin_inset Newline newline
40645 usepackage{ngerman}
40648 \begin_layout Description
40649 None will not use a language package.
40650 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40653 \begin_layout Standard
40654 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40657 \begin_layout Description
40659 \begin_inset space ~
40663 \begin_inset space ~
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40674 , but the LaTeX-package
40679 \begin_inset Index idx
40682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40683 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40689 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40690 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40691 languages in TeX code.
40694 \begin_layout Description
40695 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40696 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40697 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40700 \begin_layout Description
40702 \begin_inset space ~
40706 \begin_inset space ~
40709 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40712 \begin_layout Description
40714 \begin_inset space ~
40718 \begin_inset space ~
40721 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40724 \begin_layout Description
40726 \begin_inset space ~
40729 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40732 \begin_layout Description
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40738 \begin_inset space ~
40741 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40742 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40745 \begin_layout Description
40747 \begin_inset space ~
40751 \begin_inset space ~
40754 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40758 \begin_layout Description
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40764 \begin_inset space ~
40767 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40768 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40771 \begin_layout Description
40773 \begin_inset space ~
40777 \begin_inset space ~
40781 \begin_inset space ~
40784 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40785 \begin_inset space ~
40791 \begin_layout Description
40793 \begin_inset space ~
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40801 \begin_inset space ~
40804 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40805 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40808 \begin_layout Description
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40814 \begin_inset space ~
40817 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40818 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40819 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40820 \begin_inset space ~
40824 \begin_inset space ~
40830 \begin_layout Description
40832 \begin_inset space ~
40836 \begin_inset space ~
40839 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40840 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40841 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40842 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40853 \begin_layout Description
40855 \begin_inset space ~
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40862 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40865 \begin_layout Description
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40871 \begin_inset space ~
40874 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40877 \begin_layout Description
40879 \begin_inset space ~
40883 \begin_inset space ~
40886 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40889 \begin_layout Description
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40894 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40897 \begin_layout Description
40899 \begin_inset space ~
40902 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40905 \begin_layout Description
40907 \begin_inset space ~
40911 \begin_inset space ~
40914 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40917 \begin_layout Description
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40929 \begin_layout Description
40931 \begin_inset space ~
40935 \begin_inset space ~
40938 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40941 \begin_layout Description
40943 \begin_inset space ~
40947 \begin_inset space ~
40953 \begin_layout Description
40955 \begin_inset space ~
40959 \begin_inset space ~
40962 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40967 \begin_inset Index idx
40970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40971 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40976 , when using this, set the document language to
40981 \begin_layout Description
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40987 \begin_inset space ~
40990 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40994 , when using this, set the document language to
40997 \begin_inset space ~
41003 \begin_layout Description
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41012 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41017 \begin_inset Index idx
41020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41021 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41026 , when using this, set the document language to
41031 \begin_layout Description
41033 \begin_inset space ~
41037 \begin_inset space ~
41040 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41044 , when using this, set the document language to
41049 \begin_layout Description
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41055 \begin_inset space ~
41058 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41062 , when using this, set the document language to
41067 \begin_layout Description
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41072 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41075 \begin_layout Description
41077 \begin_inset space ~
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41085 \begin_inset space ~
41088 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41091 \begin_layout Description
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41104 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41105 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41106 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41109 \begin_layout Description
41111 \begin_inset space ~
41115 \begin_inset space ~
41121 \begin_layout Description
41123 \begin_inset space ~
41127 \begin_inset space ~
41130 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41131 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41134 \begin_layout Description
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41143 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41148 \begin_inset Index idx
41151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41152 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41157 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41160 \begin_layout Description
41162 \begin_inset space ~
41166 \begin_inset space ~
41169 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41177 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41182 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41184 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41187 \begin_layout Description
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41196 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41201 \begin_inset Index idx
41204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41205 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41210 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41213 \begin_layout Description
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41218 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41223 \begin_inset Index idx
41226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41227 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41233 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41237 \begin_layout Description
41239 \begin_inset space ~
41243 \begin_inset space ~
41247 \begin_inset space ~
41250 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41251 \begin_inset space ~
41257 \begin_layout Description
41259 \begin_inset space ~
41263 \begin_inset space ~
41267 \begin_inset space ~
41270 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41271 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41272 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41276 \begin_layout Description
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41289 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41290 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41293 \begin_layout Section
41295 \begin_inset Index idx
41298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41305 \begin_inset Index idx
41308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41315 \begin_inset Index idx
41318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41319 Color ! Shaded boxes
41325 \begin_inset Index idx
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41329 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41337 \begin_layout Standard
41338 Here you can alter the font color for the
41342 (default: black), for
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41350 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41354 (default: white) and for
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41367 sets the color back to the default.
41370 \begin_layout Standard
41371 Clicking any button showing
41379 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41380 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41381 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41382 later more quickly.
41385 \begin_layout Standard
41386 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41390 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41392 \begin_inset space ~
41395 out note appears blue in the output.)
41403 \begin_layout Standard
41404 Note, if you change the
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41412 font color and use the option
41415 \begin_inset space ~
41420 in the document settings under
41423 \begin_inset space ~
41428 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41429 \begin_inset space ~
41433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41435 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41442 \begin_layout Standard
41443 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41449 \begin_layout Standard
41453 \begin_inset space ~
41462 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41467 Code after a forced page break:
41470 \begin_layout Itemize
41471 For the page color:
41472 \begin_inset Newline newline
41479 pagecolor{color name}
41482 \begin_layout Itemize
41483 For the text color:
41484 \begin_inset Newline newline
41494 \begin_layout Standard
41495 You are restricted to one of
41531 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41544 \begin_inset Newline newline
41547 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41548 names to refer to them:
41551 \begin_layout Itemize
41557 \begin_inset Newline newline
41562 page_backgroundcolor
41565 \begin_layout Itemize
41569 \begin_inset space ~
41575 \begin_inset Newline newline
41583 \begin_layout Itemize
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41593 \begin_inset Newline newline
41601 \begin_layout Itemize
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41611 \begin_inset Newline newline
41619 \begin_layout Standard
41620 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41624 Cells of the Embedded
41625 \begin_inset space ~
41631 \begin_layout Section
41635 \begin_layout Standard
41636 Here you can adjust the
41640 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41644 as described in section
41645 \begin_inset space ~
41649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41651 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41658 \begin_layout Section
41662 \begin_layout Standard
41663 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41668 \begin_inset Index idx
41671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41672 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41682 \begin_inset Index idx
41685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41686 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41694 Sectioned bibliography
41696 using the LaTeX package
41701 \begin_inset Index idx
41704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41705 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41710 and you can select a
41714 for the generation of the bibliography.
41715 For a further description see section
41716 \begin_inset space ~
41720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41722 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41729 \begin_layout Section
41733 \begin_layout Standard
41734 Here you can define the
41738 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41746 reference "sec:Index"
41753 \begin_layout Section
41757 \begin_layout Standard
41758 The PDF properties are explained in section
41759 \begin_inset space ~
41763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41765 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41772 \begin_layout Section
41776 \begin_layout Standard
41777 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41782 \begin_inset Index idx
41785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41786 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41796 \begin_inset Index idx
41799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41800 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41810 \begin_inset Index idx
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41814 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41824 \begin_inset Index idx
41827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41828 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41833 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41836 \begin_layout Description
41837 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41838 ensure that you have enabled
41841 \begin_inset space ~
41849 \begin_layout Description
41850 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41853 \begin_inset space ~
41865 \begin_layout Description
41866 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41877 \begin_layout Description
41878 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41880 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41889 \begin_layout Section
41893 \begin_layout Standard
41894 The float placement options are described in the section
41897 \begin_inset space ~
41905 \begin_inset space ~
41913 \begin_layout Section
41917 \begin_layout Standard
41918 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41920 Program Code Listings
41925 \begin_inset space ~
41933 \begin_layout Section
41937 \begin_layout Standard
41938 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41946 set to be used and set the
41951 The itemize environment is described in section
41952 \begin_inset space ~
41956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41958 reference "sec:Itemize"
41965 \begin_layout Standard
41966 You can furthermore specify a
41969 \begin_inset space ~
41974 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41975 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41982 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41988 \begin_inset space \space{}
41992 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42002 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42003 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42006 \begin_layout Standard
42007 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42015 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42018 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42019 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42021 \begin_inset space ~
42027 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42031 usepackage{textcomp}
42034 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42038 usepackage{amssymb}
42048 \begin_layout Section
42052 \begin_layout Standard
42053 Branches are described in section
42054 \begin_inset space ~
42058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42060 reference "sec:Branches"
42067 \begin_layout Section
42069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42071 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42078 \begin_layout Standard
42079 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42082 \begin_layout Description
42084 \begin_inset space ~
42088 \begin_inset space ~
42091 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42111 View Master Document
42112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42119 Update Master Document
42120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42127 menu or the toolbar.
42128 The default is set in
42130 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42131 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42133 \begin_inset space ~
42136 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42140 \begin_inset space ~
42144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42146 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42153 \begin_layout Description
42155 \begin_inset space ~
42159 \begin_inset space ~
42162 Output settings for the menu
42164 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42166 \begin_inset space ~
42172 For a detailed description see section
42174 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42179 \begin_inset space ~
42187 \begin_layout Description
42189 \begin_inset space ~
42193 \begin_inset space ~
42196 Options offers settings for the export format
42202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42215 \begin_inset space ~
42220 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42221 \begin_inset space ~
42224 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42233 settings are described in detail in section
42235 Math Output in XHTML
42240 \begin_inset space ~
42249 \begin_inset space ~
42253 \begin_inset space ~
42258 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42261 \begin_layout Section
42266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42276 \begin_layout Standard
42277 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42278 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42279 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42280 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42284 \begin_layout Standard
42285 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42286 \begin_inset space ~
42290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42292 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42299 \begin_layout Chapter
42305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42307 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42312 \begin_inset Index idx
42315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42324 \begin_layout Standard
42325 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42327 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42331 It has the following submenus.
42334 \begin_layout Section
42338 \begin_layout Subsection
42342 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42343 User Interface File
42344 \begin_inset Index idx
42347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42348 Customization ! of toolbars
42354 \begin_inset Index idx
42357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42358 Customization ! of menus
42366 \begin_layout Standard
42367 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42368 interface (ui) file.
42369 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42377 \begin_layout Description
42382 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42385 \begin_layout Description
42392 the menu entries in popup context menus
42395 \begin_layout Description
42400 specifies the toolbar buttons
42403 \begin_layout Standard
42404 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42405 and edit the entries.
42408 \begin_layout Standard
42409 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42421 entries must be finished with an explicit
42446 and in the case of the
42447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42459 The syntax for the entries is:
42462 \begin_layout Standard
42463 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42491 \begin_layout Standard
42493 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42496 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42498 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42511 \begin_inset space ~
42519 \begin_layout Standard
42520 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42526 \begin_layout Standard
42527 For example, assuming you use the menu
42529 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42532 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42536 \begin_layout Standard
42537 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42561 \begin_layout Standard
42563 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42578 to have the sixth bookmark.
42581 \begin_layout Standard
42585 \begin_inset space ~
42590 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42591 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42595 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42606 \begin_layout Standard
42609 Enable tool tips in main work area
42611 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42619 \begin_layout Standard
42622 Restore window layouts and geometries
42624 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42625 in the last LyX session.
42628 \begin_layout Standard
42631 Restore cursor positions
42633 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42637 \begin_layout Standard
42640 Load opened files from last session
42642 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42645 \begin_layout Standard
42648 Clear all session information
42650 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42651 of last opened documents, etc.).
42654 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42658 name "sub:Backup documents"
42663 \begin_inset Index idx
42666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42675 \begin_layout Standard
42678 Backup original documents when saving
42680 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42681 it was saved the last time.
42682 It is stored in the
42685 \begin_inset space ~
42691 \begin_inset space ~
42695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42697 reference "sec:Paths"
42701 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42704 \begin_inset space ~
42710 The backup file has the file extension
42711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42725 \begin_layout Standard
42728 Backup documents, every
42730 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42733 \begin_layout Standard
42736 Save documents compressed by default
42738 always saves files in a compressed format.
42741 \begin_layout Standard
42746 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42749 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42751 \begin_inset space ~
42759 \begin_layout Standard
42762 Open documents in tabs
42764 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42767 \begin_layout Standard
42772 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42784 reference "sec:Paths"
42788 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42794 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42796 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42799 \begin_layout Standard
42802 Single close-tab button
42804 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42807 \begin_inset Graphics
42808 filename ../images/closetab.png
42815 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42816 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42819 \begin_layout Standard
42820 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42828 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42836 \begin_layout Subsection
42838 \begin_inset Index idx
42841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42850 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42857 \begin_layout Standard
42858 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42861 \begin_layout Standard
42862 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42870 This section only deals with the fonts
42875 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42878 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42879 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42890 \begin_layout Standard
42891 By default, LyX uses
42907 (depends on the system) as its
42910 \begin_inset space ~
42926 \begin_layout Standard
42927 You can change the font size with the
42934 \begin_layout Standard
42939 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42944 points have the size of 1
42945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42949 \begin_inset space ~
42953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42955 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42960 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42965 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42966 \begin_inset space ~
42970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42972 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42979 \begin_layout Standard
42982 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42984 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42985 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42986 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42987 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42989 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42990 \begin_inset space ~
42996 \begin_layout Subsection
42998 \begin_inset Index idx
43001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43008 \begin_inset Index idx
43011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43020 \begin_layout Standard
43021 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43022 the list and selecting the
43029 \begin_layout Standard
43030 By checking the option
43034 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43037 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43038 \begin_inset space ~
43042 \begin_inset space ~
43047 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43050 \begin_layout Subsection
43052 \begin_inset Index idx
43055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43064 \begin_layout Standard
43065 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43068 \begin_layout Standard
43073 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43074 This feature is described in section
43075 \begin_inset space ~
43079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43081 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43088 \begin_layout Standard
43089 Checking the option
43092 \begin_inset space ~
43096 \begin_inset space ~
43100 \begin_inset space ~
43105 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43108 \begin_layout Section
43110 \begin_inset Index idx
43113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43122 \begin_layout Subsection
43126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43130 \begin_layout Standard
43133 Cursor follows scrollbar
43135 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43139 \begin_layout Standard
43140 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43141 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43142 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43145 \begin_layout Standard
43148 Scroll below end of document
43150 is self-explanatory.
43153 \begin_layout Standard
43154 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43161 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43163 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43164 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43167 \begin_layout Standard
43170 Sort environments alphabetically
43172 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43175 \begin_layout Standard
43178 Group environments by their category
43180 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43183 \begin_layout Standard
43188 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43203 \begin_layout Standard
43204 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43209 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43210 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43214 \begin_layout Subsection
43216 \begin_inset Index idx
43219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43226 \begin_inset Index idx
43229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43230 Settings ! Shortcuts
43238 \begin_layout Standard
43243 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43244 Several binding files are available, among them:
43247 \begin_layout Description
43248 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43251 \begin_layout Description
43252 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43264 \begin_layout Description
43265 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43276 \begin_layout Standard
43277 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43282 , and binding files for special languages.
43283 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43288 \begin_inset space \space{}
43292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43300 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43304 \begin_layout Standard
43305 Some binding files, like
43309 , only have a limited scope.
43310 When looking at the end of the file
43314 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43317 \begin_layout Standard
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43325 \begin_inset space ~
43330 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43331 in the selected key binding file.
43334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43338 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43343 \begin_inset Index idx
43346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43347 Key Bindings ! Editing
43355 \begin_layout Standard
43356 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43357 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43358 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43361 Show key-bindings containing
43364 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43365 Insert there for example as keyword
43366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43373 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43374 functions that contain
43375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43383 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43384 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43388 that you will find in the
43395 \begin_layout Standard
43396 For example, to add the shortcut
43404 , select the function and press the
43409 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43410 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43413 \begin_layout Standard
43414 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43415 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43416 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43417 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43418 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43423 \begin_layout Standard
43424 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43427 \begin_layout Standard
43428 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43430 The syntax of the entries is:
43433 \begin_layout Standard
43439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43457 \begin_layout Subsection
43459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43461 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43466 \begin_inset Index idx
43469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43476 \begin_inset Index idx
43479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43480 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43488 \begin_layout Standard
43489 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43490 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43491 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43492 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43499 \begin_inset space ~
43504 and select the keyboard map file named
43511 \begin_layout Standard
43520 keyboard map and, if you use the
43524 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43527 arg "keymap-primary"
43533 arg "keymap-secondary"
43536 respectively or toggle between them with
43539 arg "keymap-toggle"
43545 \begin_layout Standard
43546 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43554 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43563 \begin_layout Standard
43564 You can also specify the mouse
43566 Wheel scrolling speed
43569 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43573 \begin_layout Standard
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \begin_inset space ~
43590 you can select a key for zooming.
43591 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43594 \begin_layout Subsection
43598 \begin_layout Standard
43599 Input completion is described in section
43600 \begin_inset space ~
43604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43606 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43613 \begin_layout Section
43615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43622 \begin_inset Index idx
43625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43632 \begin_inset Index idx
43635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43644 \begin_layout Standard
43645 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43647 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43650 \begin_layout Description
43652 \begin_inset space ~
43655 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43656 It is the default when you
43667 \begin_inset space ~
43675 \begin_layout Description
43677 \begin_inset space ~
43680 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43682 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43696 \begin_layout Description
43698 \begin_inset space ~
43701 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43707 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43711 \begin_inset Newline newline
43715 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43727 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43735 \begin_layout Description
43737 \begin_inset space ~
43741 \begin_inset Index idx
43744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43750 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43751 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43752 \begin_inset space ~
43756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43758 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43766 will be used to save the backups.
43767 \begin_inset Newline newline
43770 Backup files have the ending
43771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43781 \begin_layout Description
43786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43797 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43798 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43799 \begin_inset Newline newline
43806 You add a BibTeX-database
43811 You can edit this file with the program
43820 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43823 \begin_inset space ~
43829 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43834 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43835 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43841 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43842 \begin_inset Newline newline
43845 The pipe is also used for the
43850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43856 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43861 \begin_inset Newline newline
43864 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43865 \begin_inset Newline newline
43881 \begin_layout Description
43883 \begin_inset space ~
43886 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43889 \begin_layout Description
43891 \begin_inset space ~
43894 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43895 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43896 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43899 \begin_layout Description
43901 \begin_inset space ~
43904 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43910 You only need to specify it if you are using
43914 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43920 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43924 \begin_layout Description
43926 \begin_inset space ~
43929 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43930 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43931 where to find it on the system.
43932 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43933 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43942 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43943 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43946 \begin_layout Description
43948 \begin_inset space ~
43951 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43952 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43954 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43956 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43957 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43958 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43959 scanned for the input files.
43960 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43961 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43962 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43963 compilation may fail for some documents.
43966 \begin_layout Section
43970 \begin_layout Standard
43971 Here you can insert your
43980 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43982 \begin_inset space ~
43986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43988 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43992 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43995 \begin_layout Section
43997 \begin_inset Index idx
44000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44001 Language ! Settings
44007 \begin_inset Index idx
44010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44011 Settings ! Language
44019 \begin_layout Subsection
44021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44023 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44030 \begin_layout Description
44032 \begin_inset space ~
44036 \begin_inset space ~
44039 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44040 You can find its actual translation status here:
44041 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44043 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44050 \begin_layout Description
44052 \begin_inset space ~
44055 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44057 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44058 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44075 The most widespread language package is
44080 \begin_inset Index idx
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44084 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44089 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44090 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44091 alternative language package
44096 \begin_inset Index idx
44099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44100 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44105 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44106 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44112 The available selections are described in section
44113 \begin_inset space ~
44117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44119 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44126 \begin_layout Description
44128 \begin_inset space ~
44131 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44132 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44133 An example is the start command
44139 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44144 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44159 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44164 \begin_layout Description
44166 \begin_inset space ~
44174 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44175 command toggles the package on and off.
44178 \begin_layout Description
44180 \begin_inset space ~
44184 \begin_inset space ~
44187 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44191 \begin_layout Description
44193 \begin_inset space ~
44197 \begin_inset space ~
44200 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44201 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44202 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44203 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44210 \begin_layout Description
44212 \begin_inset space ~
44215 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44217 When this option is not set, the
44220 \begin_inset space ~
44225 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44226 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44229 \begin_inset space ~
44237 \begin_layout Description
44239 \begin_inset space ~
44245 \begin_inset space ~
44251 When it is not set, the
44254 \begin_inset space ~
44259 is set to the end of the document.
44262 \begin_layout Description
44264 \begin_inset space ~
44268 \begin_inset space ~
44271 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44272 language will be underlined in blue.
44275 \begin_layout Description
44277 \begin_inset space ~
44281 \begin_inset space ~
44284 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44285 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44288 \begin_layout Description
44290 \begin_inset space ~
44293 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44294 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44295 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44296 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44299 \begin_layout Subsection
44303 \begin_layout Standard
44304 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44305 \begin_inset space ~
44309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44311 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44318 \begin_layout Section
44322 \begin_layout Subsection
44326 \begin_layout Description
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44332 \begin_inset space ~
44335 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44338 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44339 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44341 \begin_inset space ~
44347 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44350 \begin_layout Description
44352 \begin_inset space ~
44356 \begin_inset Index idx
44359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44366 \begin_inset Index idx
44369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44370 Settings ! Date format
44375 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44376 \begin_inset Newline newline
44380 \begin_inset Flex URL
44383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44385 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44391 \begin_inset Newline newline
44394 For example the format
44395 \begin_inset Newline newline
44399 \begin_inset Newline newline
44402 prints the date as day/month/year.
44405 \begin_layout Description
44407 \begin_inset space ~
44411 \begin_inset space ~
44414 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44417 \begin_layout Description
44419 \begin_inset space ~
44422 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44424 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44426 \begin_inset space ~
44432 For a detailed description see section
44434 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44439 \begin_inset space ~
44447 \begin_layout Subsection
44449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44456 \begin_inset Index idx
44459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44466 \begin_inset Index idx
44469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44478 \begin_layout Description
44480 \begin_inset space ~
44483 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44488 The name will be used when the
44493 \begin_inset Newline newline
44497 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44505 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44513 \begin_layout Description
44515 \begin_inset space ~
44518 command is the command LyX
44519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44526 LaTeX uses for printing.
44534 \begin_layout Description
44536 \begin_inset space ~
44540 \begin_inset space ~
44543 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44544 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44545 of the program that provides the
44552 \begin_layout Description
44554 \begin_inset space ~
44558 \begin_inset space ~
44562 \begin_inset space ~
44565 printer This option works only for the
44570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44582 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44583 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44586 \begin_layout Subsection
44591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44601 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44606 \begin_inset Index idx
44609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44618 \begin_layout Description
44620 \begin_inset space ~
44627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44635 \begin_inset space ~
44639 \begin_inset space ~
44642 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44647 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44668 are used for Cyrillic.
44669 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44682 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44683 LyX sets up in the background.
44684 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44687 \begin_layout Description
44689 \begin_inset space ~
44693 \begin_inset space ~
44696 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44701 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44704 \begin_layout Description
44706 \begin_inset space ~
44710 \begin_inset space ~
44714 \begin_inset space ~
44718 \begin_inset space ~
44721 options They only have an effect when the program
44725 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44728 \begin_layout Standard
44729 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44730 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44731 manuals of the applications.
44734 \begin_layout Description
44736 \begin_inset space ~
44739 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44740 \begin_inset space ~
44744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44746 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44753 \begin_layout Description
44755 \begin_inset space ~
44758 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44759 \begin_inset space ~
44763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44765 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44772 \begin_layout Description
44774 \begin_inset space ~
44777 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44778 \begin_inset space ~
44782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44784 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44791 \begin_layout Description
44796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44804 \begin_inset space ~
44807 command Command for the program
44811 that is described in the section
44817 Additional Features
44822 \begin_layout Standard
44823 There are additionally the following options:
44826 \begin_layout Description
44828 \begin_inset space ~
44832 \begin_inset space ~
44836 \begin_inset space ~
44840 \begin_inset space ~
44844 \begin_inset space ~
44847 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44865 to separate folders.
44866 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44867 \begin_inset Index idx
44870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44877 \begin_inset Index idx
44880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44889 \begin_layout Description
44891 \begin_inset space ~
44895 \begin_inset space ~
44899 \begin_inset space ~
44903 \begin_inset space ~
44907 \begin_inset space ~
44911 \begin_inset space ~
44914 changes Removes all manually set
44920 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44921 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44923 \begin_inset space ~
44928 dialog when changing the document class.
44931 \begin_layout Section
44933 \begin_inset space ~
44937 \begin_inset Index idx
44940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44949 \begin_layout Subsection
44951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44953 name "sub:Converters"
44958 \begin_inset Index idx
44961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44970 \begin_layout Standard
44971 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44972 from one format to another.
44973 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44974 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44981 \begin_inset space ~
44986 field and press the
44991 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44995 \begin_inset space ~
45000 drop-down list, modify the
45004 field and press the
45011 \begin_layout Standard
45014 Converter File Cache
45020 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45022 Maximum Age (in days
45025 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45026 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45029 \begin_layout Standard
45030 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45031 definition, is described in the section
45042 \begin_layout Subsection
45044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45046 name "sec:File-Formats"
45051 \begin_inset Index idx
45054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45061 \begin_inset Index idx
45064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45073 \begin_layout Standard
45074 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45083 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45086 \begin_layout Standard
45087 You can also define the
45089 Default output format
45091 that is used when you use
45093 View, Update, View Master Document
45097 Update Master Document
45103 menu or the toolbar.
45106 \begin_layout Standard
45107 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45118 \begin_layout Standard
45119 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45120 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45121 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45122 This is done by specifying a
45127 More about this is described in the section
45138 \begin_layout Chapter
45139 Units available in LyX
45140 \begin_inset Index idx
45143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45152 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45159 \begin_layout Standard
45161 \begin_inset space ~
45165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45167 reference "tab:Units"
45171 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45174 \begin_layout Standard
45175 \begin_inset Float table
45181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45182 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45200 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45208 \begin_inset Tabular
45209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45210 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45363 scaled point (65536
45364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45424 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45479 % of original image width
45486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45693 \begin_layout Chapter
45695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45697 name "chap:Credits"
45704 \begin_layout Standard
45705 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45706 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45709 \begin_layout Itemize
45712 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45715 \begin_layout Itemize
45721 \begin_layout Itemize
45727 \begin_layout Itemize
45733 \begin_layout Itemize
45739 \begin_layout Itemize
45745 \begin_layout Itemize
45751 \begin_layout Itemize
45757 \begin_layout Itemize
45760 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45763 \begin_layout Itemize
45769 \begin_layout Itemize
45775 \begin_layout Itemize
45781 \begin_layout Itemize
45787 \begin_layout Itemize
45793 \begin_layout Itemize
45799 \begin_layout Itemize
45805 \begin_layout Itemize
45811 \begin_layout Itemize
45813 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45822 \begin_layout Standard
45823 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45826 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45833 \begin_layout Bibliography
45834 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45835 LatexCommand bibitem
45842 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45845 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45850 \begin_inset Newline newline
45854 \begin_inset Flex URL
45857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45859 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45867 \begin_layout Bibliography
45868 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45869 LatexCommand bibitem
45870 key "latexcompanion"
45874 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45876 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45879 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45882 \begin_layout Bibliography
45883 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45884 LatexCommand bibitem
45889 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45892 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45895 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45898 \begin_layout Bibliography
45899 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45900 LatexCommand bibitem
45907 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45910 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45913 \begin_layout Bibliography
45914 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45915 LatexCommand bibitem
45927 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45930 \begin_layout Bibliography
45931 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45932 LatexCommand bibitem
45938 \begin_inset Newline newline
45942 \begin_inset Flex URL
45945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45947 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45955 \begin_layout Bibliography
45956 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45957 LatexCommand bibitem
45963 \begin_inset Newline newline
45967 \begin_inset Flex URL
45970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45972 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45980 \begin_layout Bibliography
45981 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45982 LatexCommand bibitem
45988 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45990 name "Documentation"
45991 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46000 \begin_inset Newline newline
46004 \begin_inset Flex URL
46007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46009 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46017 \begin_layout Bibliography
46018 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46019 LatexCommand bibitem
46025 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46027 name "Documentation"
46028 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46032 how to use the program
46037 \begin_inset Newline newline
46041 \begin_inset Flex URL
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46046 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46054 \begin_layout Bibliography
46055 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46056 LatexCommand bibitem
46062 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46064 name "Documentation"
46065 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46074 \begin_inset Newline newline
46078 \begin_inset Flex URL
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46091 \begin_layout Bibliography
46092 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46093 LatexCommand bibitem
46099 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46101 name "Documentation"
46102 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46111 \begin_inset Newline newline
46115 \begin_inset Flex URL
46118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46120 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46128 \begin_layout Bibliography
46129 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46130 LatexCommand bibitem
46136 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46138 name "Documentation"
46139 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46143 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46144 \begin_inset Newline newline
46148 \begin_inset Flex URL
46151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46153 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46161 \begin_layout Bibliography
46162 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46163 LatexCommand bibitem
46169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46171 name "Documentation"
46172 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46176 of the LaTeX-package
46181 \begin_inset Index idx
46184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46185 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46191 \begin_inset Newline newline
46195 \begin_inset Flex URL
46198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46200 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46208 \begin_layout Bibliography
46209 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46210 LatexCommand bibitem
46216 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46218 name "Documentation"
46219 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46223 of the LaTeX-package
46228 \begin_inset Index idx
46231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46232 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46238 \begin_inset Newline newline
46242 \begin_inset Flex URL
46245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46247 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46255 \begin_layout Bibliography
46256 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46257 LatexCommand bibitem
46263 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46265 name "Documentation"
46266 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46270 of the LaTeX-package
46275 \begin_inset Index idx
46278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46279 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46285 \begin_inset Newline newline
46289 \begin_inset Flex URL
46292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46294 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46302 \begin_layout Bibliography
46303 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46304 LatexCommand bibitem
46310 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46312 name "Documentation"
46313 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46317 of the LaTeX-package
46322 \begin_inset Index idx
46325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46326 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46332 \begin_inset Newline newline
46336 \begin_inset Flex URL
46339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46341 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46349 \begin_layout Bibliography
46350 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46351 LatexCommand bibitem
46357 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46359 name "Documentation"
46360 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46364 of the LaTeX-package
46369 \begin_inset Index idx
46372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46373 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46379 \begin_inset Newline newline
46383 \begin_inset Flex URL
46386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46388 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46396 \begin_layout Bibliography
46397 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46398 LatexCommand bibitem
46404 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46406 name "Documentation"
46407 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46411 of the LaTeX-package
46416 \begin_inset Index idx
46419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46420 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46426 \begin_inset Newline newline
46430 \begin_inset Flex URL
46433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46435 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46443 \begin_layout Bibliography
46444 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46445 LatexCommand bibitem
46451 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46453 name "Documentation"
46454 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46458 of the LaTeX-package
46463 \begin_inset Index idx
46466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46467 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46473 \begin_inset Newline newline
46477 \begin_inset Flex URL
46480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46482 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46490 \begin_layout Bibliography
46491 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46492 LatexCommand bibitem
46498 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46501 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46505 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46506 \begin_inset Newline newline
46510 \begin_inset Flex URL
46513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46515 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46523 \begin_layout Bibliography
46524 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46525 LatexCommand bibitem
46531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46534 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46538 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46539 \begin_inset Newline newline
46543 \begin_inset Flex URL
46546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46548 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46556 \begin_layout Bibliography
46557 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46558 LatexCommand bibitem
46564 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46567 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46571 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46572 \begin_inset Newline newline
46576 \begin_inset Flex URL
46579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46581 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46589 \begin_layout Bibliography
46590 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46591 LatexCommand bibitem
46597 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46600 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46604 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46605 \begin_inset Newline newline
46609 \begin_inset Flex URL
46612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46614 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46622 \begin_layout Bibliography
46623 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46624 LatexCommand bibitem
46630 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46633 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46637 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46638 \begin_inset Newline newline
46642 \begin_inset Flex URL
46645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46647 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46655 \begin_layout Bibliography
46656 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46657 LatexCommand bibitem
46663 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46666 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46670 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46671 \begin_inset Newline newline
46675 \begin_inset Flex URL
46678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46680 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46688 \begin_layout Bibliography
46689 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46690 LatexCommand bibitem
46696 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46699 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46703 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46704 \begin_inset Newline newline
46708 \begin_inset Flex URL
46711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46713 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46721 \begin_layout Bibliography
46722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46723 LatexCommand bibitem
46729 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46732 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46736 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46737 \begin_inset Newline newline
46741 \begin_inset Flex URL
46744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46746 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46754 \begin_layout Bibliography
46755 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46756 LatexCommand bibitem
46762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46765 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46769 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46770 \begin_inset Newline newline
46774 \begin_inset Flex URL
46777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46779 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46787 \begin_layout Bibliography
46788 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46789 LatexCommand bibitem
46795 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46798 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46802 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46803 \begin_inset Newline newline
46807 \begin_inset Flex URL
46810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46812 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46820 \begin_layout Bibliography
46821 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46822 LatexCommand bibitem
46828 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46831 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46835 about new features in
46840 \begin_inset Newline newline
46844 \begin_inset Flex URL
46847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46849 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46857 \begin_layout Standard
46858 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46892 \begin_inset Note Note
46895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46902 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46903 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46904 bibliography is the second one:
46912 \begin_layout Standard
46913 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46914 LatexCommand bibtex
46915 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46916 options "biblio/alphadin"
46923 \begin_layout Standard
46924 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46927 \begin_layout Standard
46928 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46929 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46935 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46936 LatexCommand printindex